[go: up one dir, main page]

TW201921606A - Semiconductor device manufacturing method and adhesive laminate - Google Patents

Semiconductor device manufacturing method and adhesive laminate

Info

Publication number
TW201921606A
TW201921606A TW107126790A TW107126790A TW201921606A TW 201921606 A TW201921606 A TW 201921606A TW 107126790 A TW107126790 A TW 107126790A TW 107126790 A TW107126790 A TW 107126790A TW 201921606 A TW201921606 A TW 201921606A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
adhesive layer
adhesive
semiconductor device
manufacturing
semiconductor
Prior art date
Application number
TW107126790A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
岡本直也
山田忠知
菊池和浩
Original Assignee
日商琳得科股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日商琳得科股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商琳得科股份有限公司
Publication of TW201921606A publication Critical patent/TW201921606A/en

Links

Classifications

    • H10W74/019
    • H10W74/012
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J11/00Features of adhesives not provided for in group C09J9/00, e.g. additives
    • C09J11/02Non-macromolecular additives
    • C09J11/04Non-macromolecular additives inorganic
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J11/00Features of adhesives not provided for in group C09J9/00, e.g. additives
    • C09J11/02Non-macromolecular additives
    • C09J11/06Non-macromolecular additives organic
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J201/00Adhesives based on unspecified macromolecular compounds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/20Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by their carriers
    • C09J7/22Plastics; Metallised plastics
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/30Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/30Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
    • C09J7/38Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA]
    • H10W20/40
    • H10W72/013
    • H10W72/071
    • H10W72/30
    • H10W74/016
    • H10W74/15
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2203/00Applications of adhesives in processes or use of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2203/326Applications of adhesives in processes or use of adhesives in the form of films or foils for bonding electronic components such as wafers, chips or semiconductors
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2301/00Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2301/30Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier
    • C09J2301/302Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier the adhesive being pressure-sensitive, i.e. tacky at temperatures inferior to 30°C
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2301/00Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2301/30Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier
    • C09J2301/304Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier the adhesive being heat-activatable, i.e. not tacky at temperatures inferior to 30°C
    • H10W70/60
    • H10W72/241
    • H10W72/874
    • H10W72/9413
    • H10W74/142

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • Inorganic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Adhesives Or Adhesive Processes (AREA)
  • Encapsulation Of And Coatings For Semiconductor Or Solid State Devices (AREA)

Abstract

一種半導體裝置之製造方法,其特徵為具有:隔著接著劑層而貼附基材(11)與半導體元件的步驟、使前述接著劑層硬化而形成硬化接著劑層(12A)的步驟、密封複數之前述半導體元件而形成具有密封樹脂層的密封體(3)的步驟、不由密封體(3)剝離前述硬化接著劑層(12A)而由密封體(3)剝離基材(11)的步驟、形成與前述半導體元件電性連接的再配線層的步驟、使外部端子電極電性連接於前述再配線層的步驟。A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device, comprising: a step of attaching a substrate (11) and a semiconductor element via an adhesive layer; a step of curing the adhesive layer to form a hardened adhesive layer (12A); and sealing. A step of forming a sealing body (3) having a sealing resin layer by the plurality of semiconductor elements, a step of peeling the substrate (11) from the sealing body (3) without peeling the hardening adhesive layer (12A) from the sealing body (3) A step of forming a redistribution layer electrically connected to the semiconductor element, and a step of electrically connecting an external terminal electrode to the redistribution layer.

Description

半導體裝置之製造方法、及接著層合體Method for manufacturing semiconductor device, and adhesive laminate

本發明係關於半導體裝置之製造方法、及接著層合體。This invention relates to the manufacturing method of a semiconductor device, and a laminated body.

近年來,電子機器之小型化、輕量化及高機能化正在發展。在搭載於電子機器的半導體裝置亦要求小型化、薄型化及高密度化。半導體晶片(有僅稱為晶片的情況)係有被安裝於接近該尺寸的封裝。如此的封裝係亦被稱為晶片規模封裝(Chip Scale Package;CSP)。作為製造CSP的製程之一,可舉出晶圓等級封裝(Wafer Level Package;WLP)。在WLP係在藉由切割而將封裝單片化前,於晶片電路形成面形成外部電極等,最後係切割包含晶片的封裝晶圓,進行單片化。作為WLP係可舉出扇入(Fan-In)型和扇出(Fan-Out)型。在扇出型之WLP(以下,有簡寫為FO-WLP的情況。)係將半導體晶片,以成為大於晶片尺寸的區域之方式,以密封構件被覆而形成半導體晶片密封體,將再配線層及外部電極,不僅在半導體晶片之電路面亦在密封構件之表面區域形成。
例如,於文獻1(日本特開2012-62372號公報)係記載被使用於WLP等之製造方法的晶片暫時固定用之黏著膠帶。文獻1有記載該黏著膠帶係用以防止因樹脂密封之時之壓力而晶片不被保持而從指定之位置偏離的不良狀況而使用之情事。如此的不良狀況係有稱為晶粒位移(Die shift)的情況。
然而,文獻1所記載的黏著膠帶係用以暫時固定用之膠帶,所以黏著力低,有因樹脂密封之時之壓力而晶片從指定之位置偏離的疑慮。
In recent years, the miniaturization, weight reduction, and high performance of electronic devices are progressing. Semiconductor devices mounted in electronic devices are also required to be reduced in size, thickness, and density. A semiconductor wafer (in some cases, it is simply called a wafer) is a package mounted near this size. Such a package system is also referred to as a Chip Scale Package (CSP). One of the processes for manufacturing a CSP includes a wafer level package (Wafer Level Package; WLP). Before the WLP system singulates the package by singulation, external electrodes and the like are formed on the chip circuit formation surface, and finally, the package wafer including the chip is singulated and singulated. Examples of the WLP system include a fan-in type and a fan-out type. In the fan-out type WLP (hereinafter, it may be abbreviated as FO-WLP), a semiconductor wafer is formed by covering a semiconductor wafer with a sealing member so as to form an area larger than the wafer size, and a redistribution layer and The external electrode is formed not only on the circuit surface of the semiconductor wafer but also on the surface area of the sealing member.
For example, Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-62372) describes an adhesive tape for temporarily fixing a wafer used in a manufacturing method such as WLP. Document 1 describes that the adhesive tape is used to prevent the wafer from being held away from the specified position due to the pressure when the resin is sealed. Such a failure is referred to as a “die shift”.
However, the adhesive tape described in Document 1 is a tape for temporary fixing, so the adhesive force is low, and there is a concern that the wafer may deviate from a specified position due to the pressure at the time of resin sealing.

本發明之目的係提供一種半導體裝置之製造方法、及使用於該製造方法的接著層合體,該製造方法係可抑制因樹脂密封之時之壓力而晶片等之半導體元件從指定之位置偏離的不良狀況,可高機能化。
關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法係其特徵為具有:隔著接著劑層而貼附基材與半導體元件的步驟、使前述接著劑層硬化而形成硬化接著劑層的步驟、密封複數之前述半導體元件而形成具有密封樹脂層的密封體的步驟、不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層而是由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟、形成與前述半導體元件電性連接的再配線層的步驟、及使外部端子電極電性連接於前述再配線層的步驟。
在關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法,其係於具有前述基材與前述接著劑層的接著層合體之前述接著劑層,貼附複數之前述半導體元件為較佳。
在關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法,其係前述接著劑層為直接層合於前述基材為較佳。
在關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法,其係於前述接著劑層與前述基材之間,包含黏著劑層為較佳。
在關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法,其係由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟係不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層,而是在前述黏著劑層與前述硬化接著劑層之界面剝離的步驟為較佳。
在關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法,其係於前述黏著劑層為熱膨脹性黏著劑層為較佳。
在關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法,其係前述半導體元件係具有前述接著劑層為較佳。
在關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法,其係於具有前述基材與黏著劑層的黏著薄片之前述黏著劑層,貼合前述半導體元件之前述接著劑層為較佳。
在關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法,其係由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟係不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層,而是在前述黏著劑層與前述硬化接著劑層之界面剝離的步驟為較佳。
在關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法,其係前述接著劑層係至少包含第一接著劑層與第二接著劑層,前述第一接著劑層與前述第二接著劑層係材質相互相異為較佳。
在關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法,其係使前述接著劑層硬化而形成前述硬化接著劑層的步驟係使前述第一接著劑層硬化而形成第一硬化接著劑層、與使前述第二接著劑層硬化而形成第二硬化接著劑層的步驟為較佳。
在關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法,其係隔著前述接著劑層而貼附複數之前述半導體元件與前述基材時,將與前述半導體元件之具有連接端子的電路面係相反側之元件背面,朝向前述接著劑層而貼附,在密封複數之前述半導體元件而形成前述密封體後,除去覆蓋前述電路面的前述密封樹脂層之一部分或全體而使前述連接端子露出,使前述再配線層電性連接於已露出的前述連接端子為較佳。
在關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法,其係隔著前述接著劑層而貼附複數之前述半導體元件與前述基材時,將前述半導體元件之具有連接端子的電路面,朝向前述接著劑層而貼附,由前述密封體剝離前述基材後,除去覆蓋前述電路面的前述硬化接著劑層之一部分或全體而使前述連接端子露出,使前述再配線層電性連接於已露出的前述連接端子為較佳。
在關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法,其係使前述接著劑層硬化而形成前述硬化接著劑層的步驟之前,貼附補強框架於前述接著劑層為較佳。
關於本發明之一態樣的接著層合體係具備基材,與含有接著劑組成物的接著劑層,其特徵為:前述接著劑組成物係含有黏合劑聚合物成分及硬化性成分,且被使用於半導體裝置之製造製程,該半導體裝置之製造製程係具有:貼附複數之半導體元件於前述接著層合體之前述接著劑層的步驟、使前述接著劑層硬化而形成硬化接著劑層的步驟、密封複數之前述半導體元件而形成密封體的步驟、不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層,而是由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟、形成與前述半導體元件電性連接的再配線層的步驟、及使外部端子電極電性連接於前述再配線層的步驟。
藉由本發明之一態樣,則可提供一種半導體裝置之製造方法,該製造方法係可抑制因樹脂密封之時之壓力而晶片等之半導體元件從指定之位置偏離的不良狀況,可高機能化。
又,藉由本發明之一態樣,則可提供一種接著層合體,其係可抑制因在半導體裝置之製造方法的樹脂密封之時之壓力而晶片等之半導體元件從指定之位置偏離的不良狀況,可為半導體裝置之高機能化。
尚,作為高機能化係例如,成為可得到高精細及各構件之相對性的位置精度優異,且具有再配線層及外部端子電極的半導體裝置之情事。
An object of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device and an adhesive laminate used in the method. The manufacturing method is capable of suppressing a defect in which a semiconductor element such as a wafer deviates from a specified position due to a pressure at the time of resin sealing. Conditions can be highly functional.
A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an aspect of the present invention includes a step of attaching a substrate and a semiconductor element via an adhesive layer, a step of curing the adhesive layer to form a cured adhesive layer, A step of sealing a plurality of the semiconductor elements to form a sealing body having a sealing resin layer; a step of peeling the base material from the sealing body without peeling the hardened adhesive layer from the sealing body; and forming an electrically connected with the semiconductor element A step of rewiring a layer and a step of electrically connecting an external terminal electrode to the aforementioned redistribution layer.
In a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an aspect of the present invention, it is preferable that the semiconductor device includes a plurality of the semiconductor elements and the adhesive layer having the adhesive layer of the adhesive layer of the substrate and the adhesive layer.
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an aspect of the present invention, it is preferable that the adhesive layer is directly laminated on the substrate.
In a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an aspect of the present invention, it is preferable that the adhesive layer is included between the adhesive layer and the substrate.
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an aspect of the present invention, the step of peeling the substrate from the sealing body is not to peel the hardening adhesive layer from the sealing body, but to bond the hardening and adhesive layer to the adhesive layer. The step of interfacial peeling of the agent layer is preferred.
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an aspect of the present invention, it is preferable that the aforementioned adhesive layer is a thermally expandable adhesive layer.
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an aspect of the present invention, it is preferable that the semiconductor element has the adhesive layer.
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to one aspect of the present invention, it is preferable that the adhesive layer is an adhesive sheet having the substrate and an adhesive layer, and the adhesive layer is preferably attached to the semiconductor element.
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to one aspect of the present invention, the step of peeling the substrate from the sealing body is not to peel the hardening adhesive layer from the sealing body, but to bond the hardening adhesive layer to the hardening adhesive layer. The step of interfacial peeling of the agent layer is preferred.
In a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an aspect of the present invention, the adhesive layer system includes at least a first adhesive layer and a second adhesive layer, and the first adhesive layer and the second adhesive layer system. It is better that the materials are different from each other.
In a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an aspect of the present invention, the step of curing the adhesive layer to form the cured adhesive layer is curing the first adhesive layer to form a first cured adhesive layer, The step of hardening the second adhesive layer to form a second hardened adhesive layer is preferred.
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to one aspect of the present invention, when a plurality of the semiconductor element and the substrate are attached via the adhesive layer, a circuit surface having a connection terminal with the semiconductor element is connected. The element back surface on the opposite side is attached to the adhesive layer, and after sealing the plurality of semiconductor elements to form the sealing body, a part or the whole of the sealing resin layer covering the circuit surface is removed to expose the connection terminals. The redistribution layer is preferably electrically connected to the exposed connection terminal.
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to one aspect of the present invention, when a plurality of the semiconductor elements and the base material are pasted through the adhesive layer, the circuit surface of the semiconductor element having the connection terminals is oriented toward The adhesive layer is affixed, and after the substrate is peeled from the sealing body, a part or the entirety of the hardened adhesive layer covering the circuit surface is removed to expose the connection terminals, and the rewiring layer is electrically connected to the The exposed connection terminal is preferable.
Before the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an aspect of the present invention, the step of curing the adhesive layer to form the cured adhesive layer, it is preferable to attach a reinforcing frame to the adhesive layer.
In one aspect of the present invention, the adhesive lamination system includes a base material and an adhesive layer containing an adhesive composition, wherein the adhesive composition system contains an adhesive polymer component and a hardening component, and is It is used in a manufacturing process of a semiconductor device. The manufacturing process of the semiconductor device includes a step of attaching a plurality of semiconductor elements to the aforementioned adhesive layer of the aforementioned adhesive laminate, and a step of curing the aforementioned adhesive layer to form a hardened adhesive layer. And a step of sealing a plurality of the semiconductor elements to form a sealing body, a step of not peeling the hardening adhesive layer from the sealing body, but a step of peeling the substrate from the sealing body, and forming a rewiring layer electrically connected to the semiconductor element And a step of electrically connecting the external terminal electrode to the redistribution layer.
According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device, which can suppress a defect in which a semiconductor element such as a wafer deviates from a specified position due to a pressure at the time of resin sealing, and can be highly functional. .
Furthermore, according to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide an adhesive laminate which can suppress a semiconductor device such as a wafer from being deviated from a predetermined position due to a pressure at the time of resin sealing in a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device. , Can be a high-performance semiconductor device.
As a high-performance system, for example, it has become a semiconductor device that can obtain high-definition and relative position accuracy of each member, and has a redistribution layer and external terminal electrodes.

在關於本發明之一實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係使用接著層合體。接著層合體係具備基材與接著劑層。尚,在本說明書中,接著層合體係並非如貼附於被黏物後被剝離之方式的黏著薄片(暫時固定用薄片),接著層合體所具備的接著劑層係相較於黏著薄片之黏著劑層而言,具有強固地被固定於被黏物的接著力。
關於本發明之一實施形態的接著層合體係具備基材與含有接著劑組成物的接著劑層的接著層合體;前述接著劑組成物係含有黏合劑聚合物成分及硬化性成分;被使用於半導體裝置之製造製程,該製造製程係具有:貼附複數之半導體元件於前述接著層合體之前述接著劑層的步驟、使前述接著劑層硬化而形成硬化接著劑層的步驟、密封複數之前述半導體元件而形成密封體的步驟、不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層而由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟、形成與前述半導體元件電性連接的再配線層的步驟、使外部端子電極電性連接於前述再配線層的步驟。
關於本發明之一態樣的半導體裝置之製造方法係具有:於接著層合體之前述接著劑層貼附複數之半導體元件的步驟、使前述接著劑層硬化而形成硬化接著劑層的步驟、密封複數之前述半導體元件而形成具有密封樹脂層的密封體的步驟、不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層而由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟、形成與前述半導體元件電性連接的再配線層的步驟、使外部端子電極電性連接於前述再配線層的步驟。
又,在關於本發明之一實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法亦有使用包含接著劑層及黏著劑層的接著層合體的情況。如此的接著層合體係具備基材、與接著劑層、與黏著劑層。
又,在關於本發明之一實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係亦有使用具備接著劑層的半導體元件的情況。在此情況,半導體元件所具備的接著劑層係相較於黏著薄片之黏著劑層而言,具有強固地被固定於被黏物的接著力。
又,在關於本發明之一實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法,亦有接著劑層為包含第一接著劑層與第二接著劑層的情況。

[第1實施形態]
關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係具有:貼附複數之半導體元件於接著層合體之接著劑層的步驟、使前述接著劑層硬化而形成硬化接著劑層的步驟、密封複數之前述半導體元件而形成具有密封樹脂層的密封體的步驟、不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層而由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟、形成與前述半導體元件電性連接的再配線層的步驟、使外部端子電極電性連接於前述再配線層的步驟;在貼附複數之前述半導體元件於前述接著層合體時,將與前述半導體元件之具有連接端子的電路面係相反側之元件背面,朝向前述接著劑層而貼附,在密封前述半導體元件而形成前述密封體後,除去覆蓋前述電路面的前述密封樹脂層之一部分或全體而使前述連接端子露出,使前述再配線層電性連接於已露出的前述連接端子。
在使前述接著劑層硬化而形成前述硬化接著劑層的步驟之前,貼附補強框架於前述接著劑層為較佳。

(基材)
在本實施形態的接著層合體之基材係支撐接著劑層等的構件。接著層合體之基材係無特別限定。
基材係例如為樹脂薄膜。作為樹脂薄膜係例如可使用由聚乙烯薄膜、聚丙烯薄膜、聚丁烯薄膜、聚丁二烯薄膜、聚甲基戊烯薄膜、聚氯乙烯薄膜、氯乙烯共聚物薄膜、聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯薄膜、聚萘二甲酸乙二酯薄膜、聚對苯二甲酸丁二酯薄膜、聚胺基甲酸酯薄膜、乙烯乙酸乙烯酯共聚物薄膜、離子聚合物樹脂薄膜、乙烯‧(甲基)丙烯酸共聚物薄膜、乙烯‧(甲基)丙烯酸酯共聚物薄膜、聚苯乙烯薄膜、聚碳酸酯薄膜、聚醯亞胺薄膜及氟樹脂薄膜所構成的群中選擇的至少任一之薄膜。又,作為基材,亦可使用此等之交聯薄膜。進而,基材係亦可為此等之層合薄膜。
又,基材係例如亦可為硬質支撐體。硬質支撐體之材質係考慮機械上的強度及耐熱性等而適宜決定即可。硬質支撐體之材質係例如可舉出金屬材料、非金屬無機材料、樹脂材料及複合材料等。作為金屬材料係例如可舉出SUS等。作為非金屬無機材料係例如可舉出玻璃及矽晶圓等。作為樹脂材料係例如可舉出環氧樹脂、ABS、丙烯酸、工程塑膠、超級工程塑膠、聚醯亞胺及聚醯胺醯亞胺等。作為複合材料係例如可舉出玻璃環氧樹脂等。在此等之中,尤其是硬質支撐體之材質係由SUS、玻璃及矽晶圓等所構成的群中選擇的任一之材質為較佳。作為工程塑膠係可舉出尼龍、聚碳酸酯(PC)及聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯(PET)等。作為超級工程塑膠係可舉出聚苯硫(PPS)、聚醚碸(PES)及聚醚醚酮(PEEK)等。
基材之厚度係無特別限定。基材之厚度係較佳為20μm以上、50mm以下,更佳為60μm以上、20mm以下。以基材之厚度設為上述範圍,在基材為樹脂薄膜的情況係因為接著層合體具有充分的可撓性,所以對於工件顯現良好的貼附性。作為工件係例如為半導體元件,作為較具體的例子係半導體晶片等。在基材為硬質支撐體的情況,硬質支撐體之厚度係考慮機械上的強度及操作性等而適宜決定即可。硬質支撐體之厚度係例如為100μm以上、50mm以下。

(接著劑層)
在本實施形態的接著層合體之接著劑層係含有由外部接受能量而硬化的硬化性之接著劑組成物為較佳。作為由外部供給的能量係例如可舉出紫外線、電子束及熱等。接著劑層係含有紫外線硬化型接著劑及熱硬化型接著劑之至少任一種為較佳。在接著層合體之基材為具備耐熱性的情況係因為可抑制熱硬化時之殘存應力之產生,所以接著劑層係含有熱硬化型接著劑的熱硬化性之接著劑層為較佳。
接著劑層係例如含有第一接著劑組成物。第一接著劑組成物係含有黏合劑聚合物成分(A)及硬化性成分(B)。

(A)黏合劑聚合物成分
為了對接著劑層賦與充分的接著性及造膜性(薄片形成性)所以使用黏合劑聚合物成分(A)。作為黏合劑聚合物成分(A)係可使用先前一般周知之聚合物,具體而言係可使用丙烯酸聚合物、聚酯樹脂、胺基甲酸酯樹脂、丙烯酸胺基甲酸酯樹脂、聚矽氧樹脂及橡膠系聚合物等。
黏合劑聚合物成分(A)之重量平均分子量(Mw)係1萬以上、200萬以下為較佳,10萬以上、120萬以下為更佳。黏合劑聚合物成分(A)之重量平均分子量若過低則接著劑層與黏著薄片之黏著力變高,有產生接著劑層之轉印不良之情事,若過高則接著劑層之接著性低下,有成為無法轉印於晶片等、或是在轉印後保護膜從晶片等剝離之情事。
在本說明書中,重量平均分子量(Mw)係藉由凝膠‧滲透‧層析(Gel Permeation Chromatography;GPC)法而測定的標準聚苯乙烯換算值。
作為黏合劑聚合物成分(A),可較佳地使用丙烯酸聚合物。丙烯酸聚合物之玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)係較佳為在-60℃以上、50℃以下,更佳為-50℃以上、40℃以下,進而佳為-40℃以上、30℃以下之範圍。若丙烯酸聚合物之玻璃轉移溫度過低則接著劑層與黏著薄片之剝離力變大而有產生接著劑層之轉印不良之情事,若過高則接著劑層之接著性低下,有成為無法轉印於晶片等、或是在轉印後保護膜從晶片等剝離之情事。
作為構成上述丙烯酸聚合物的單體係可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體或該衍生物。例如,烷基之碳數為1以上、18以下的烷基(甲基)丙烯酸酯,具體而言係可舉出甲基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、乙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、丙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、丁基(甲基)丙烯酸酯及2-乙基己基(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。又,具有環狀骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯,具體而言係可舉出環己基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、苄基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、異冰片基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二環戊基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二環戊烯基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二環戊烯氧基乙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯及醯亞胺(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。進而作為具有官能基的單體,可舉出具有羥基的羥甲基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、2-羥乙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯及2-羥丙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。此外,作為構成上述丙烯酸聚合物的單體係可舉出具有環氧基的縮水甘油基(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。作為丙烯酸聚合物係含有具有羥基的單體的丙烯酸聚合物,而因為與後述的硬化性成分(B)之相溶性佳所以為較佳。又,上述丙烯酸聚合物係亦可由丙烯酸、甲基丙烯酸、衣康酸、乙酸乙烯酯、丙烯腈及苯乙烯等所構成的群中選擇至少一種之單體進行共聚。
更進一步,作為黏合劑聚合物成分(A),亦可調配用以保持硬化後之保護膜(硬化接著劑層)之可撓性之熱可塑性樹脂。作為如此的熱可塑性樹脂係重量平均分子量為1000以上、10萬以下之熱可塑性樹脂為較佳,3000以上、8萬以下之熱可塑性樹脂為進而佳。熱可塑性樹脂之玻璃轉移溫度係-30℃以上、120℃以下為較佳,-20℃以上、120℃以下為更佳。作為熱可塑性樹脂係可舉出聚酯樹脂、胺基甲酸酯樹脂、苯氧基樹脂、聚丁烯、聚丁二烯及聚苯乙烯等。此等之熱可塑性樹脂係可單獨1種、或混合2種以上而使用。第一接著劑組成物為藉由含有上述之熱可塑性樹脂作為黏合劑聚合物成分(A),接著劑層追隨於接著劑層之轉印面而可抑制孔隙等之產生。

(B)硬化性成分
硬化性成分(B)係可使用熱硬化性成分及能量射線硬化性成分之中至少任一之成分。作為硬化性成分(B),亦可使用熱硬化性成分及能量射線硬化性成分雙方。
作為熱硬化性成分係可使用熱硬化樹脂及熱硬化劑。作為熱硬化樹脂係例如環氧樹脂為較佳。
作為環氧樹脂係可使用先前一般周知之環氧樹脂。作為環氧樹脂,具體而言係可舉出多官能環氧樹脂、雙酚A二縮水甘油醚、雙酚A二縮水甘油醚之氫化物、鄰甲酚酚醛清漆環氧樹脂、二環戊二烯型環氧樹脂、聯苯型環氧樹脂、雙酚A型環氧樹脂、雙酚F型環氧樹脂及伸苯基骨架型環氧樹脂等,於分子中具有2官能以上的環氧化合物。環氧樹脂係可單獨1種或組合2種以上而使用。
於接著劑層係相對於黏合劑聚合物成分(A)100質量份而言,熱硬化樹脂係較佳為包含1質量份以上、1000質量份以下,更佳為包含10質量份以上、500質量份以下,進而佳為包含20質量份以上、200質量份以下。若熱硬化樹脂之含量為未達1質量份,則有無法得到充分的接著性之情事。若熱硬化樹脂之含量為超過1000質量份則接著劑層與基材之剝離力變高,有產生接著劑層之轉印不良之情事。
熱硬化劑係作為對於熱硬化樹脂、特別是對於環氧樹脂的硬化劑而發揮機能。作為較佳的熱硬化劑,係可舉出於1分子中具有2個以上的可與環氧基反應的官能基的化合物。作為可與環氧基反應的官能基係可舉出酚性羥基、醇性羥基、胺基、羧基、及酸酐基等。在此等官能基之中,由酚性羥基、胺基及酸酐基等所構成的群中選擇的至少一種之基為較佳,酚性羥基及胺基所構成的群中選擇的至少一種之基為更佳。
作為酚系硬化劑之具體的例子係可舉出多官能系酚樹脂、聯酚、酚醛清漆型酚樹脂、二環戊二烯系酚樹脂、新酚醛型酚樹脂及芳烷基酚樹脂作為胺系硬化劑之具體例係可舉出DICY(二氰二胺)。此等熱硬化劑係可單獨1種、或混合2種以上而使用。
熱硬化劑之含量係相對於熱硬化樹脂100質量份而言,0.1質量份以上、500質量份以下為較佳,1質量份以上、200質量份以下為更佳。若熱硬化劑之含量少則有硬化不足而無法得到接著性之情事。又,若熱硬化劑之含量過剩,則有接著劑層之吸濕率高而使半導體裝置之信賴性降低。
接著劑層為作為硬化性成分(B),在含有熱硬化性成分的情況,接著劑層係具有熱硬化性。在此情況,成為可藉由加熱接著劑層而硬化。在本實施形態之接著層合體,於基材具有耐熱性的情況係在接著劑層之熱硬化之時,難以產生於基材產生殘存應力而產生不良狀況之情事。
作為能量射線硬化性成分係可使用包含能量射線聚合性基,若接受紫外線、或電子束等之能量射線之照射就進行聚合硬化的低分子化合物(能量射線聚合性化合物)。作為如此的能量射線硬化性成分,具體而言係可舉出三羥甲基丙烷三丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇三丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇單羥基五丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯、或1,4-丁二醇二丙烯酸酯、1,6-己二醇二丙烯酸酯、聚乙二醇二丙烯酸酯、丙烯酸酯寡酯、胺基甲酸酯丙烯酸酯系寡聚物、環氧改質丙烯酸酯、聚醚丙烯酸酯及伊康酸寡聚物等之丙烯酸酯系化合物。
能量射線聚合性化合物係在分子內具有至少1個之聚合性雙鍵。
能量射線聚合性化合物之重量平均分子量係通常為100以上、30000以下,較佳為300以上、10000以下。
能量射線聚合性化合物之調配量係相對於黏合劑聚合物成分(A)100質量份而言,較佳為包含1質量份以上、1500質量份以下,更佳為包含10質量份以上、500質量份以下,進而佳為包含20質量份以上、200質量份以下。
又,作為能量射線硬化性成分,亦可使用能量射線硬化型聚合物,其係於黏合劑聚合物成分(A)之主鏈或側鏈鍵結能量射線聚合性基而成。如此的能量射線硬化型聚合物係兼具作為黏合劑聚合物成分(A)之機能和作為硬化性成分(B)之機能。
能量射線硬化型聚合物之主骨架係無特別限定。能量射線硬化型聚合物之主骨架,係較佳為作為黏合劑聚合物成分(A)泛用的丙烯酸聚合物。又,能量射線硬化型聚合物之主骨架,係聚酯或聚醚等亦為較佳。因為合成及物性之控制為容易,所以將丙烯酸聚合物設為能量射線硬化型聚合物之主骨架為更佳。
鍵結於能量射線硬化型聚合物之主鏈或側鏈的能量射線聚合性基,例如包含能量射線聚合性之碳–碳雙鍵的基。能量射線聚合性基係具體而言,可舉出(甲基)丙烯醯基等。能量射線聚合性基係亦可隔著伸烷基、伸烷氧基、或聚伸烷氧基而鍵結於能量射線硬化型聚合物。
已鍵結能量射線聚合性基的能量射線硬化型聚合物之重量平均分子量(Mw)係1萬以上、200萬以下為較佳,10萬以上、150萬以下為更佳。
能量射線硬化型聚合物之玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)係-60℃以上、50℃以下為較佳,-50℃以上、40℃以下為更佳,-40℃以上、30℃以下為進而佳。
能量射線硬化型聚合物係例如使含有官能基的丙烯酸聚合物、與含聚合性基之化合物反應而得。作為含有此官能基的丙烯酸聚合物所具有的官能基係例如可舉出羥基、羧基、胺基、取代胺基及環氧基等。此含聚合性基之化合物,係可與丙烯酸聚合物所具有的該官能基進行反應的取代基、以及能量射線聚合性碳–碳雙鍵,在每1分子具有1個以上、5個以下。作為與丙烯酸聚合物所具有的該官能基進行反應的取代基係可舉出異氰酸酯基、縮水甘油基及羧基等。
作為含聚合性基之化合物係可舉出(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基異氰酸酯、間異丙烯基-α,α-二甲基苄基異氰酸酯、(甲基)丙烯醯基異氰酸酯、烯丙基異氰酸酯、縮水甘油基(甲基)丙烯酸酯及(甲基)丙烯酸等。
丙烯酸聚合物係具有由羥基、羧基、胺基、取代胺基和環氧基等所構成的群中選擇至少一種之官能基的(甲基)丙烯酸單體或該衍生物、和與此可共聚的其他(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體或該衍生物所構成的共聚物為較佳。
作為具有羥基、羧基、胺基、取代胺基、環氧基等之官能基的(甲基)丙烯酸單體或該衍生物係例如可舉出具有羥基的2-羥乙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯及2-羥丙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、具有羧基的丙烯酸、甲基丙烯酸及衣康酸,以及具有環氧基的縮水甘油基甲基丙烯酸酯及縮水甘油基丙烯酸酯等。
作為與上述(甲基)丙烯酸單體可共聚的其他(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體或該衍生物係例如,可舉出烷基之碳數為1以上、18以下的烷基(甲基)丙烯酸酯,具體而言係可舉出甲基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、乙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、丙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、丁基(甲基)丙烯酸酯及2-乙基己基(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。
作為與上述(甲基)丙烯酸單體可共聚的其他(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體或該衍生物係例如可舉出具有環狀骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯,具體而言係可舉出環己基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、苄基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、異冰片基丙烯酸酯、二環戊基丙烯酸酯、二環戊烯基丙烯酸酯、二環戊烯氧基乙基丙烯酸酯及醯亞胺丙烯酸酯等。又,於上述丙烯酸聚合物係例如亦可由乙酸乙烯酯、丙烯腈及苯乙烯所構成的群中選擇至少任一者進行共聚。
即使是使用能量射線硬化型聚合物的情況,亦併用前述的能量射線聚合性化合物,又亦可併用黏合劑聚合物成分(A)。在本實施形態的接著劑層中之此等三者(黏合劑聚合物成分(A)、能量射線聚合性化合物、及能量射線硬化型聚合物)之調配量之關係係相對於能量射線硬化型聚合物及黏合劑聚合物成分(A)之質量之合計100質量份而言,能量射線聚合性化合物係較佳為包含1質量份以上、1500質量份以下,更佳為包含10質量份以上、500質量份以下,進而佳為包含20質量份以上、200質量份以下。
以賦與能量射線硬化性於接著劑層,可簡便且在短時間硬化接著劑層,附硬化接著劑層之晶片之生產效率提昇。硬化接著劑層係亦可作為用以保護半導體元件之保護膜而發揮機能。先前,晶片等之半導體元件用之保護膜係一般上藉由環氧樹脂等之熱硬化樹脂而形成,但熱硬化樹脂之硬化溫度係超過200℃,又,硬化時間係需要2小時左右,所以會成為提昇生產效率之障礙。但是,能量射線硬化性之接著劑層係因為藉由能量射線照射而在短時間內硬化,所以可簡便地形成保護膜,可有助於生產效率之提昇。

‧其他成分
接著劑層係除了上述黏合劑聚合物成分(A)及硬化性成分(B)以外,亦可包含下述成分作為其他成分。接著劑層係作為其他成分,可包含由著色劑(C)、硬化促進劑(D)、偶合劑(E)、無機填充材料(F)、光聚合起始劑(G)、交聯劑(H)及泛用添加劑(I)所構成的群中選擇至少一種以上。

(C)著色劑
接著劑層係含有著色劑(C)為較佳。以於接著劑層調配著色劑,將半導體裝置裝入機器時,遮蔽來自周圍之裝置所產生的紅外線等,可防止因紅外線等所致的半導體裝置之故障。又,於硬化接著劑層而得到的硬化接著劑層(保護膜),將產品號碼等印字時之文字之視覺辨認性為提昇。亦即,在已形成保護膜的半導體裝置或半導體晶片係於保護膜之表面,型號等通常藉由雷射標記法(例如,藉由雷射光而刮取保護膜表面而進行印字的方法)而印字。以保護膜含有著色劑(C),可充分得到保護膜之藉由雷射光而已刮取的部分與並非如此的部分之對比差,提昇視覺辨認性。作為著色劑(C)係可使用有機顏料、無機顏料、有機染料及無機染料之至少任一者。作為著色劑(C)係由電磁波及紅外線遮蔽性之觀點視之,黑色顏料為較佳。作為黑色顏料係無特別限定。作為黑色顏料係例如可舉出碳黑、氧化鐵、二氧化錳、苯胺黑及活性碳等。由提昇半導體裝置之信賴性的觀點係作為黑色顏料,碳黑為特別佳。著色劑(C)係可以單獨使用1種,亦可組合2種以上而使用。在本實施形態,使用使可見光及紅外線之至少任一者與紫外線雙方之透過性降低的著色劑,在紫外線之透過性已降低的情況,接著劑層之高硬化性為特別佳地發揮。作為使可見光及紅外線之至少任一者與紫外線雙方之透過性降低的著色劑係除了上述之黑色顏料以外,如為在可見光及紅外線之至少任一者與紫外線雙方之波長區域具有吸收性或反射性的著色劑,則無特別限定。
著色劑(C)之調配量係相對於構成接著劑層的全固體成分100質量份而言,0.1質量份以上、35質量份以下為較佳,0.5質量份以上、25質量份以下為更佳,1質量份以上、15質量份以下為進而佳。

(D)硬化促進劑
硬化促進劑(D)係為了調整接著劑層之硬化速度而使用。硬化促進劑(D)係特別是在硬化性成分(B)中,於併用環氧樹脂與熱硬化劑的情況下被較佳地使用。
硬化促進劑(D)係由3級胺類、咪唑類、有機膦類及四苯硼鹽所構成的群中選擇的至少一種為較佳。
作為3級胺類係例如可舉出三亞乙基二胺、苄基二甲基胺、三乙醇胺、二甲基胺基乙醇及參(二甲基胺基甲基)酚等。
作為咪唑類係例如可舉出2-甲基咪唑,2-苯基咪唑,2-苯基-4-甲基咪唑,2-苯基-4,5-二羥甲基咪唑及2-苯基-4-甲基-5-羥甲基咪唑等。
作為有機膦類係例如可舉出三丁基膦、二苯基膦及三苯基膦等。
作為四苯硼鹽係例如可舉出四苯基鏻四苯基硼酸鹽及三苯基膦四苯基硼酸鹽等。
硬化促進劑(D)係可單獨1種、或混合2種以上而使用。
硬化促進劑(D)係相對於硬化性成分(B)100質量份而言,以0.01質量份以上、10質量份以下之量包含為較佳,以0.1質量份以上、1質量份以下之量包含為更佳。藉由在上述範圍之量含有硬化促進劑(D),即使曝露於高溫度且高濕度之條件下,接著劑層亦具有優異的接著特性。又,藉由在上述範圍之量含有硬化促進劑(D),接著劑層係即使為曝露於嚴酷的回焊條件的情況,亦可達成高信賴性。若硬化促進劑(D)之含量少則硬化不足而有無法得到充分的接著特性的疑慮,若具有高極性的硬化促進劑之含量過剩,則在高溫度且高濕度之條件下,因硬化促進劑移動至接著劑層之接著界面側而偏析,有半導體裝置之信賴性降低的疑慮。

(E)偶合劑
偶合劑(E)係亦可為了使接著劑層之對於半導體元件的接著性、密著性及硬化接著劑層(保護膜)之凝聚性之至少任一者提昇而使用。又,以使用偶合劑(E),可不損及將接著劑層硬化而得的硬化接著劑層(保護膜)之耐熱性,而提昇該耐水性。
作為偶合劑(E)係較佳地使用與具有黏合劑聚合物成分(A)、或硬化性成分(B)等的官能基進行反應的基的化合物。作為偶合劑(E)係矽烷偶合劑為最佳。作為如此的偶合劑係可舉出γ-縮水甘油氧基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、γ-縮水甘油氧基丙基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、β-(3,4-環氧環己基)乙基三甲氧基矽烷、γ-(甲基丙烯醯氧基丙基)三甲氧基矽烷、γ-胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、N-6-(胺基乙基)-γ-胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、N-6-(胺基乙基)-γ-胺基丙基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、N-苯基-γ-胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、γ-脲基丙基三乙氧基矽烷、γ-巰基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、γ-巰基丙基甲基二甲氧基矽烷、雙(3-三乙氧基矽烷基丙基)四硫烷、甲基三甲氧基矽烷、甲基三乙氧基矽烷、乙烯基三甲氧基矽烷、乙烯基三乙醯氧基矽烷及咪唑矽烷等。偶合劑(E)係可單獨1種或混合2種以上而使用。
偶合劑(E)係相對於黏合劑聚合物成分(A)及硬化性成分(B)之合計100質量份而言,通常以0.1質量份以上、20質量份以下,較佳為0.2質量份以上、10質量份以下,更佳為0.3質量份以上、5質量份以下之比例包含。若偶合劑(E)之含量為未達0.1質量份,則有無法得到上述之效果的可能性。若偶合劑(E)之含量為超過20質量份,則有成為逸出氣體之原因的可能性。

(F)無機填充材料
藉由調配無機填充材料(F)於接著劑層,可調整在硬化後之硬化接著劑層(保護膜)的熱膨脹係數。以最適化對於半導體晶片而硬化後之硬化接著劑層(保護膜)之熱膨脹係數,可使半導體裝置之信賴性提昇。又,亦可使硬化後之硬化接著劑層(保護膜)之吸濕率降低。
作為較佳的無機填充材料係可舉出二氧化矽、氧化鋁、滑石、碳酸鈣、氧化鈦、氧化鐵、碳化矽及氮化硼等之粉末、已球形化此等之粉末的珠粒、單晶纖維以及玻璃纖維等。在此等無機填充材料之中,二氧化矽填料及氧化鋁填料為較佳。上述無機填充材料(F)係可單獨或混合2種以上而使用。無機填充材料(F)之含量係相對於構成接著劑層的全固體成分100質量份而言,通常可在1質量份以上、80質量份以下之範圍內調整。

(G)光聚合起始劑
接著劑層為在作為前述的硬化性成分(B)含有能量射線硬化性成分的情況,係在該之使用時照射紫外線等之能量射線,使能量射線硬化性成分硬化。在此時,於構成接著劑層的組成物中含有光聚合起始劑(G),可縮短聚合硬化時間,進而,可將光線照射量變少。
作為如此的光聚合起始劑(G),具體而言係可舉出二苯甲酮、苯乙酮、苯偶姻、苯偶姻甲醚、苯偶姻乙醚、苯偶姻異丙醚、苯偶姻異丁醚、苯偶姻苯甲酸、苯甲酸苯甲酸甲酯、苯偶姻二甲基縮酮、2,4-二乙基噻噸酮、α-羥基環己基苯基酮、苄基二苯硫醚、四甲基秋蘭姆單硫醚、偶氮二異丁腈、苄基、二苄基、二乙醯基、1,2-二苯基甲烷、2-羥基-2-甲基-1-[4-(1-甲基乙烯基)苯基]丙酮、2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基二苯基膦氧化物及β-氯蒽醌等。光聚合起始劑(G)係可單獨1種或組合2種以上而使用。
光聚合起始劑(G)之搭配比例係相對於能量射線硬化性成分100質量份而言,包含0.1質量份以上、10質量份以下為較佳,包含1質量份以上、5質量份以下為更佳。光聚合起始劑(G)之搭配比例,若為未達0.1質量份則因光聚合之不足而有無法得到滿足的轉印性的疑慮。光聚合起始劑(G)之搭配比例,若為超過10質量份則會產生無助於光聚合的殘留物,有接著劑層之硬化性成為不充分的疑慮。

(H)交聯劑
為了調節接著劑層之初期接著力及凝聚力,亦可於接著劑層添加交聯劑(H)。作為交聯劑(H)係可舉出有機多元異氰酸酯化合物及有機多元亞胺化合物等。
作為上述有機多元異氰酸酯化合物係可舉出芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物、脂肪族多元異氰酸酯化合物、脂環族多元異氰酸酯化合物及此等之有機多元異氰酸酯化合物的三聚物、以及使此等有機多元異氰酸酯化合物與多元醇化合物反應而得的末端異氰酸酯胺基甲酸酯預聚物等。
作為有機多元異氰酸酯化合物係例如可舉出2,4-甲苯二異氰酸酯、2,6-甲苯二異氰酸酯、1,3-二甲苯二異氰酸酯、1,4-二甲苯二異氰酸酯、二苯甲烷-4,4’-二異氰酸酯、二苯甲烷-2,4’-二異氰酸酯、3-甲基二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯、六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、異佛酮二異氰酸酯、二環己基甲烷-4,4’-二異氰酸酯、二環己基甲烷-2,4’-二異氰酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷加成物甲苯二異氰酸酯及賴氨酸異氰酸酯。
作為上述有機多元亞胺化合物係可舉出N,N’-二苯基甲烷-4,4’-雙(1-氮丙啶羧基醯胺)、三羥甲基丙烷-三-β-氮丙啶基丙酸酯、四羥甲基甲烷-三-β-氮丙啶基丙酸酯及N,N’-甲苯-2,4-雙(1-氮丙啶羧基醯胺)三亞乙基三聚氰胺等。
交聯劑(H)係相對於黏合劑聚合物成分(A)及能量射線硬化型聚合物之合計量100質量份而言,通常以0.01質量份以上、20質量份以下,較佳為0.1質量份以上、10質量份以下,更佳為0.5質量份以上、5質量份以下之比例使用。

(I)泛用添加劑
於接著劑層係除了上述以外,按照必要,亦可調配泛用添加劑(I)。作為泛用添加劑係可舉出整平劑、可塑劑、防帶電劑、防氧化劑、離子捕捉劑、吸除劑及鏈轉移劑等。
由如上述般的各成分所構成的接著劑層係具有接著性與硬化性,在未硬化狀態係以按壓工件(半導體晶圓或晶片等)而容易地接著。然後經由硬化,最後係可給予耐衝擊性高的硬化接著劑層(保護膜),於接著強度亦優異,在嚴酷的高溫度且高濕度條件下亦可保持充分的保護機能。尚,接著劑層係可為單層構造,又,只要將包含上述成分的層包含1層以上,亦可為多層構造。
接著劑層之厚度係無特別限定。接著劑層之厚度係3μm以上、300μm以下為較佳,5μm以上、250μm以下為更佳,7μm以上、200μm以下為進而佳。
表示在接著劑層的可見光及紅外線之至少任一者和紫外線之透過性的尺度,在波長300nm以上、1200nm以下的最大透過率係20%以下為較佳,0%以上、15%以下為更佳,超過0%、10%以下為更佳,0.001%以上、8%以下為進而佳。以將在波長300nm以上、1200nm以下的接著劑層之最大透過率設為上述範圍,在接著劑層含有能量射線硬化性成分(特別是紫外線硬化性成分)的情況係即使是接著劑層被著色的情況,硬化性亦優異。又,產生可見光波長區域及紅外波長區域之至少任一之透過性之降低,可得到防止半導體裝置之起因於紅外線之故障、或提昇印字之視覺辨認性的效果。在波長300nm以上、1200nm以下的接著劑層之最大透過率係藉由上述著色劑(C)而可調整。尚,接著劑層之最大透過率係使用UV-vis光譜檢查裝置(島津製作所公司製),測定硬化後之接著劑層(厚度25μm)之300nm以上、1200nm以下之全光線透過率,設為透過率之最高的值(最大透過率)。

(半導體裝置之製造方法)
第1圖(第1A圖~第1E圖)及第2圖(第2A圖~第2D圖)係表示關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法之一例的圖。
在關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係使用具備基材11與接著劑層12的接著層合體1。在關於本實施形態的接著層合體1,接著劑層12係直接層合於基材11。
接著劑層12係含有由外部接受能量而硬化的硬化型接著劑為較佳。作為由外部供給的能量係例如可舉出紫外線、電子束及熱等。接著劑層12係含有紫外線硬化型接著劑及熱硬化型接著劑之至少任一種為較佳。在本實施形態,作為含有於接著劑層12的接著劑係例如前述之第一接著劑組成物為較佳。

‧半導體晶片貼附步驟
於第1A圖及第1B圖係表示說明使半導體晶片CP貼附於接著層合體1之接著劑層12的步驟(有稱為半導體晶片貼附步驟的情況。)的剖面概略圖。尚,於第1A圖係表示1個半導體晶片CP,但在本實施形態係如第1B圖所示之方式使複數之半導體晶片CP貼附於接著劑層12。在使半導體晶片CP貼附時係可1個個地貼附,亦可使複數之半導體晶片CP同時貼附。
在本實施形態使用的半導體晶片CP係具有連接端子W3所設置的電路面W1、和作為與電路面W1係相反側之元件背面之晶片背面W2。在本實施形態係使晶片背面W2貼附於接著劑層12。

‧補強框架貼附步驟
在本實施形態係更具有於接著層合體1貼附補強框架2的步驟(有稱為補強框架貼附步驟的情況。)為較佳(參照第1A圖及第1B圖)。藉由將補強框架2貼附於接著層合體1,在半導體裝置之製造方法之製程中的使半導體晶片CP貼附的接著層合體1之操作性等為提昇。
補強框架2之形狀係無特別限定。例如,可舉出一種形成為框狀的補強框架,其係包圍已貼附於接著層合體1的複數之半導體晶片CP所貼附區域全體之外周。又,可舉出一種補強框架,其係形成為包圍每1個或複數之半導體晶片CP的格子狀。又,可舉出一種形成為十字狀的補強框架,其係將已貼附於接著層合體1的複數之半導體晶片CP所貼附的區域,區分為複數之區域。
貼附補強框架2的步驟係可在使半導體晶片CP貼附於接著層合體1的步驟之前實施,亦可在使半導體晶片CP貼附於接著層合體1的步驟之後實施。

‧接著劑層硬化步驟
於第1C圖係表示說明使接著劑層12硬化而形成硬化接著劑層12A的步驟(有稱為接著劑層硬化步驟的情況。)的剖面概略圖。藉由使接著劑層12硬化,半導體晶片CP係藉由硬化接著劑層12A而強固地接著,可抑制在之後之樹脂密封步驟的半導體晶片CP之移動。
作為接著劑層之硬化之程度係可舉出完全硬化、或半硬化(B載台化)。
使接著劑層12硬化的方法係按照接著劑層12含有的接著劑之種類而適宜地選擇為較佳。接著劑層12所含有的接著劑,如為紫外線硬化型接著劑,則將紫外線照射於接著劑層12,使接著劑層12硬化。為了已照射的紫外線到達接著劑層12,接著劑層12進行硬化,所以接著層合體1之基材11係具有紫外線透過性為較佳。
在本實施形態係因為補強框架2被貼附於接著劑層12,所以可抑制因接著劑層12硬化時之收縮所致的接著層合體1之撓曲及捲曲。因而,在使接著劑層12硬化而形成硬化接著劑層12A的步驟之前,先使補強框架2貼附於接著劑層12為較佳。

‧密封步驟
於第1D圖係表示說明硬化接著劑層12A之形成後,密封複數之半導體晶片CP的步驟(有稱為密封步驟的情況。)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態,係將半導體晶片CP之電路面W1側藉由密封構件30而被覆而形成密封體3。於複數之半導體晶片CP之間亦填充密封構件30。在本實施形態係因為補強框架2亦被放進密封體3之內部,所以密封體3之剛性提昇,可抑制在樹脂密封後產生的半導體封裝之彎曲。
使用密封構件30而密封複數之半導體晶片CP的方法係無特別限定。
例如,亦可採用將已被接著層合體1支撐的複數之半導體晶片CP載置於模具內,注入具有流動性的密封樹脂材料於模具內,使密封樹脂材料加熱硬化而形成密封樹脂層的方法。又,亦可採用將薄片狀之密封樹脂以被覆複數之半導體晶片CP之電路面W1之方式載置,使密封樹脂加熱硬化,形成密封樹脂層的方法。又,亦可採用以被覆半導體晶片CP及補強框架2之方式載置薄片狀之密封樹脂,使密封樹脂加熱硬化,形成密封樹脂層的方法。在使用薄片狀之密封樹脂的情況係藉由真空層疊法而密封半導體晶片CP及補強框架2為較佳。藉由此真空層疊法,可防止於半導體晶片CP與補強框架2之間產生空隙。藉由真空層疊法所致的加熱硬化之溫度條件範圍係例如為80℃以上、120℃以下。
作為密封構件30之材質係例如可舉出環氧樹脂等。於作為密封構件30使用的環氧樹脂係例如亦可包含酚樹脂、彈性體、無機填充材料及硬化促進劑等。
在密封步驟與接下來之步驟之間,進而亦可實施使密封構件30硬化的步驟(有稱為追加之硬化步驟的情況)。在此步驟係作為例子可舉出加熱密封樹脂層而促進硬化的方法。尚,亦可不實施追加之硬化步驟而是藉由在密封步驟的加熱而使密封構件30充分地硬化。

‧基材剝離步驟
於第1E圖係表示說明在密封複數之半導體晶片CP之後,剝離接著層合體1之基材11的步驟(有稱為基材剝離步驟的情況。)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態係就將硬化接著劑層12A留在密封體3的態樣,從密封體3剝離基材11。

‧連接端子露出步驟
於第2A圖係表示說明於密封體3之表面使半導體晶片CP之連接端子W3露出的步驟(有稱為連接端子露出步驟的情況。)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態係除去被覆半導體晶片CP之電路面W1及連接端子W3的密封體3之密封樹脂層之一部分或全體而使連接端子W3露出。使半導體晶片CP之連接端子W3露出的方法係無特別限定。作為使半導體晶片CP之連接端子W3露出的方法係例如可舉出研削密封樹脂層而使連接端子W3露出的方法、將密封樹脂層藉由雷射照射等之方法而除去而使連接端子W3露出的方法、以及將密封樹脂層藉由蝕刻法而除去而使連接端子W3露出的方法等。如與後述的再配線層可電性連接,則可使連接端子W3之全體露出,亦可使連接端子W3之一部分露出。

‧再配線層形成步驟
於第2B圖係表示說明形成與半導體晶片CP電性連接的再配線層4的步驟(有稱為再配線層形成步驟的情況。)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態係使再配線層4、與露出於密封體3之表面的連接端子W3進行電性連接。在本實施形態係將再配線層4,形成於電路面W1之上、及密封體3之面3S之上。形成再配線層4的方法係可採用先前一般周知之方法。
再配線層4係具有用以使外部端子電極連接之外部電極墊41。在本實施形態,外部電極墊41係形成於複數處所。在本實施形態,亦形成扇出(Fan-Out)於半導體晶片CP之區域外的外部電極墊41。

‧外部端子電極連接步驟
於第2C圖係表示說明使外部端子電極5電性連接於再配線層4的步驟(有稱為外部端子電極連接步驟的情況。)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態係於外部電極墊41,載置銲球等之外部端子電極5,藉由焊接等,使外部端子電極5與外部電極墊41電性連接。銲球之材質係無特別限定,例如可舉出含鉛焊料、及無鉛焊料等。

‧單片化步驟
於第2D圖係表示說明將已連接外部端子電極5的密封體3單片化的步驟(有稱為單片化步驟的情況。)的剖面概略圖。
將密封體3單片化的方法係無特別限定。作為單片化的方法係例如可舉出使用切割鋸等之切斷手段而單片化的方法、及雷射照射法等。將密封體3單片化的步驟,係亦可使密封體3貼附於切割薄片等之黏著薄片而實施。
在本實施形態,係藉由以包含複數之半導體晶片CP之方式將密封體3單片化,製造包含複數之半導體晶片CP的半導體封裝100。在半導體封裝100係保持在硬化接著劑層12A接著於半導體晶片CP之晶片背面W2的樣態。亦即,接著層合體1之接著劑層12係並非於樹脂密封後被剝離的暫時固定用,而是作為硬化接著劑層12A強固地接著於半導體晶片CP而包含作為半導體封裝100之一部分。
在本實施形態,因為使外部端子電極5連接於扇出(Fan-Out)至半導體晶片CP之區域外的外部電極墊41,所以半導體封裝100係可使用作為扇出型之晶圓等級封裝(FO-WLP)。

‧安裝步驟
本實施形態之半導體裝置之製造方法係包含將半導體封裝100安裝於印刷電路板等的步驟(有稱為安裝步驟的情況。)亦較佳。

‧實施形態之效果
藉由關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法,則可抑制因樹脂密封時之壓力而半導體晶片CP從指定之位置偏移的不良狀況。
相較於如文獻1之使用黏著膠帶作為暫時固定用的方法,在本實施形態之製造方法係使用接著層合體,進而使接著劑層12硬化後,實施半導體晶片CP之樹脂密封。因此,藉由關於本實施形態的接著層合體,則相較於關於先前之方法的黏著膠帶而言,可將半導體晶片CP更強固地在硬化接著劑層12A保持,可抑制由指定之位置偏移的不良狀況(晶粒位移)。
又,相較於如文獻1之使用黏著膠帶的方法而言,在本實施形態之製造方法係因為使接著劑層12硬化而形成硬化接著劑層12A,所以即使並非如文獻1之方法之方式固定半導體晶片CP於基板,亦藉由硬化接著劑層12A之剛性而可防止半導體晶片CP之操作性之低下。因此,減少在半導體裝置之製造方法使用的構件及步驟,可簡化製造步驟。
又,硬化接著劑層12A係因為具有剛性,所以密封體3之剛性提昇,可抑制在樹脂密封後產生的半導體封裝之彎曲。
硬化接著劑層12A係因為作為半導體封裝100之一部分而被包含,所以在硬化接著劑層12A為以可雷射印字的材質形成的情況,係可將製造號碼等之識別資訊印字於半導體封裝100之硬化接著劑層12A。

[第2實施形態]
關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係具有:貼附複數之半導體元件於接著層合體之接著劑層的步驟、使前述接著劑層硬化而形成硬化接著劑層的步驟、密封複數之前述半導體元件而形成具有密封樹脂層的密封體的步驟、不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層而由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟、形成與前述半導體元件電性連接的再配線層的步驟、使外部端子電極電性連接於前述再配線層的步驟;在貼附複數之前述半導體元件於前述接著層合體時,將與前述半導體元件之具有連接端子的電路面,朝向前述接著劑層而貼附,由前述密封體剝離前述基材後,除去覆蓋前述電路面的前述硬化接著劑層之一部分或全體而使前述連接端子露出,使前述再配線層電性連接於已露出的前述連接端子。
在使前述接著劑層硬化而形成前述硬化接著劑層的步驟之前,貼附補強框架於前述接著劑層為較佳。

(基材)
在本實施形態的接著層合體之基材亦無特別限定,例如,可使用與在第1實施形態說明的基材同樣之基材。

(接著劑層)
在本實施形態的接著層合體之接著劑層亦含有由外部接受能量而硬化的硬化型接著劑為較佳。接著劑層係含有紫外線硬化型接著劑及熱硬化型接著劑之至少任一種為較佳。在接著層合體之基材為具備耐熱性的情況係因為可抑制熱硬化時之殘存應力之產生,所以接著劑層係含有熱硬化型接著劑的熱硬化性之接著劑層為較佳。
本實施形態之接著劑層係例如含有第二接著劑組成物。
於接著劑層係藉由具有反應性雙鍵基的黏合劑成分之添加而可賦與薄片形狀維持性及硬化性。又,黏合劑成分係除了反應性雙鍵基以外,因為包含後述的環氧基,所以以該環氧基相互間或反應性雙鍵基相互間為加成聚合,藉由形成三維網目構造而實現接著劑層之硬化。該結果,接著劑層係相較於由不具有反應性雙鍵基的黏合劑成分所構成的接著劑層而言,可使半導體裝置之信賴性提昇。進而,於接著劑層添加於表面具有後述的反應性雙鍵基的填充材料(L)的情況,具有反應性雙鍵基的黏合劑成分係相較於不具有反應性雙鍵基的黏合劑成分而言,與該填充材料(L)之相溶性高。
作為具有反應性雙鍵基的黏合劑成分係可舉出聚合物成分(J)及熱硬化性成分(K)。反應性雙鍵基係包含聚合物成分(J)及熱硬化性成分(K)之至少一方即可。聚合物成分係有稱為黏合劑聚合物成分的情況。
第二接著劑組成物係含有聚合物成分(J)及熱硬化性成分(K)為較佳。
尚,在到達將接著劑層進行硬化之期間,用以先暫時接著於工件之機能的初期接著性係可為感壓接著性,亦可為藉由熱而軟化而接著的性質。初期接著性係通常藉由黏合劑成分之諸特性、及後述的填充材料(L)之調配量之調整等而控制。

(J)聚合物成分
聚合物成分(J)係將賦與薄片形狀維持性於接著劑層作為主目的而添加。
為了達成上述之目的,聚合物成分(J)之重量平均分子量(Mw)係通常為20,000以上,20,000以上、3,000,000以下為較佳。
作為聚合物成分(J)係可使用由丙烯酸聚合物、聚酯、苯氧基樹脂、聚碳酸酯、聚醚、聚胺基甲酸酯、聚矽氧烷及橡膠系聚合物等所構成的群中選擇至少一種。又,亦可為此等之2種以上組合的聚合物成分,作為如此的2種以上組合的聚合物成分係例如可舉出藉由於具有羥基的丙烯酸聚合物的丙烯酸多元醇,使在分子末端具有異氰酸酯基的胺基甲酸酯預聚物反應而得到的丙烯酸胺基甲酸酯樹脂等。進而,作為聚合物成分(J)係包含2種以上已鍵結的聚合物,亦可組合此等之2種以上而使用。

(J1)丙烯酸聚合物
作為聚合物成分(J),係可較佳地使用丙烯酸聚合物(J1)。丙烯酸聚合物(J1)之玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)係較佳為在 -60℃以上、50℃以下,更佳為-50℃以上、40℃以下,進而佳為-40℃以上、30℃以下之範圍。若丙烯酸聚合物(J1)之玻璃轉移溫度高,則接著劑層之接著性降低,有成為無法轉印於工件的疑慮。
丙烯酸聚合物(J1)之重量平均分子量(Mw)係100,000以上、1,500,000以下為較佳。若丙烯酸聚合物(J1)之重量平均分子量高,則接著劑層之接著性降低,有成為無法轉印於工件的疑慮。
丙烯酸聚合物(J1)係作為構成丙烯酸聚合物(J1)的單體,至少,包含(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體或該衍生物。作為(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體或該衍生物係可舉出在日本特開2016-027655號公報所記載之丙烯酸聚合物(A1)所例示的丙烯酸聚合物。尚,作為構成丙烯酸聚合物(J1)的單體,亦可使用具有羧基的單體。作為後述的熱硬化性成分(K),在使用環氧系熱硬化性成分的情況,係因為羧基會與環氧系熱硬化性成分中之環氧基進行反應,所以具有羧基的單體之使用量係少為較佳。
在丙烯酸聚合物(J1)為具有反應性雙鍵基的情況,反應性雙鍵基係被加成於成為丙烯酸聚合物(J1)之骨架的連續構造之單位中、或被加成於末端。
具有反應性雙鍵基的丙烯酸聚合物(J1),係例如使具有反應性官能基的丙烯酸聚合物、與在每1分子中具有1個以上、5個以下之與該反應性官能基進行反應的取代基及反應性雙鍵基之含聚合性基之化合物進行反應而得。
作為丙烯酸聚合物(J1)所具有的反應性雙鍵基係較佳為可舉出乙烯基、烯丙基及(甲基)丙烯醯基等。
丙烯酸聚合物(J1)所具有的反應性官能基係與在日本特開2016-027655號公報所記載之成分(A)的反應性官能基為同義。具有反應性官能基的丙烯酸聚合物係可以在該公報之成分(A)所記載的方法得到。作為含聚合性基之化合物係與在日本特開2016-027655號公報記載之成分(AD)所例示的能量射線硬化型聚合物相同。
在接著劑層含有後述的交聯劑(N)的情況,丙烯酸聚合物(J1)係具有反應性官能基為較佳。
其中,作為反應性官能基具有羥基的丙烯酸聚合物(J1)係因為該製造為容易,使用交聯劑(N)而導入交聯構造變為容易所以為較佳。又,具有羥基的丙烯酸聚合物(J1)係與後述的熱硬化性成分(K)之相溶性優異。
作為構成丙烯酸聚合物(J1)的單體,藉由使用具有反應性官能基的單體而將反應性官能基導入至丙烯酸聚合物(J1)的情況,具有反應性官能基的單體之構成丙烯酸聚合物(J1)的單體全質量中之比例係1質量%以上、20質量%以下為較佳,3質量%以上、15質量%以下為更佳。在,將在丙烯酸聚合物(J1)中的來自具有反應性官能基的單體的構成單位設為上述範圍,反應性官能基與交聯劑(N)之交聯性官能基進行反應而形成三維網目構造,可提昇丙烯酸聚合物(J1)之交聯密度。結果,接著劑層係剪切強度優異。又,因為接著劑層之吸水性降低,所以可得到封裝信賴性優異的半導體裝置。

(J2)非丙烯酸系樹脂
又,作為聚合物成分(J),係可使用非丙烯酸系樹脂(J2)。非丙烯酸系樹脂(J2)係由聚酯、苯氧基樹脂、聚碳酸酯、聚醚、聚胺基甲酸酯、聚矽氧烷及橡膠系聚合物所構成的群中選擇的樹脂、或由此等之群中選擇2種以上之樹脂為鍵結的樹脂。非丙烯酸系樹脂(J2)係可使用單獨1種或亦可使用2種以上之組合。非丙烯酸系樹脂(J2)之重量平均分子量係20,000以上、100,000以下為較佳,20,000以上、80,000以下為更佳。
非丙烯酸系樹脂(J2)之玻璃轉移溫度係較佳為在-30℃以上、150℃以下,進而佳為在-20℃以上、120℃以下之範圍。
在併用非丙烯酸系樹脂(J2)與上述之丙烯酸聚合物(J1)的情況係在將接著劑層轉印於工件時,接著劑層可追隨於轉印面而更抑制孔隙等之產生。
在將非丙烯酸系樹脂(J2),與上述之丙烯酸聚合物(J1)併用的情況係非丙烯酸系樹脂(J2)之含量係在非丙烯酸系樹脂(J2)與丙烯酸聚合物(J1)之質量比(J2:J1),通常在1:99~60:40、較佳為在1:99~30:70之範圍。藉由非丙烯酸系樹脂(J2)之含量在此範圍,可得到上述之效果。
作為聚合物成分(J),在使用側鏈具有環氧基的丙烯酸聚合物(J1)或苯氧基樹脂的情況,係有聚合物成分(J)所具有的環氧基為參與熱硬化之情事,但在本實施形態係如此的聚合物或樹脂,均非熱硬化成分(K),而是作為聚合物成分(J)操作。

(K)熱硬化性成分
熱硬化性成分(K)係將賦與熱硬化性於接著劑層作為主目的而添加。
熱硬化性成分(K)係含有具有環氧基的化合物(以下,有僅記載為「環氧化合物」之情事。)。作為熱硬化性成分(K)係組合環氧化合物與熱硬化劑而使用為較佳。
熱硬化性成分(K)係因為與聚合物成分(J)組合而使用,所以抑制用以形成接著劑層之塗布用組成物之黏度,由使操作性提昇等之觀點視之,通常,熱硬化性成分(K)之重量平均分子量(Mw)係10,000以下,100以上、10,000以下為較佳。
作為環氧化合物係有具有反應性雙鍵基的環氧化合物(K1)及不具有反應性雙鍵基的環氧化合物(K1’)。作為熱硬化劑係有具有反應性雙鍵基的熱硬化劑(K2)及不具有反應性雙鍵基的熱硬化劑(K2’)。在本實施形態的熱硬化性成分(K)為具有反應性雙鍵基的情況係將具有反應性雙鍵基的環氧化合物(K1)及具有反應性雙鍵基的熱硬化劑(K2)之至少一方作為必需成分而包含。

(K1)具有反應性雙鍵基的環氧化合物
具有反應性雙鍵基的環氧化合物(K1)係為了接著劑層之熱硬化後之強度及耐熱性提昇,所以具有芳香環為較佳。作為環氧化合物(K1)所具有的反應性雙鍵基係較佳為可舉出乙烯基、烯丙基及(甲基)丙烯醯基等,更佳為(甲基)丙烯醯基,進而佳為丙烯醯基。
具有如此的反應性雙鍵基的環氧化合物(K1),係例如可舉出多官能之環氧化合物之環氧基之一部分被變換為包含反應性雙鍵基的基而成的化合物。如此的化合物係例如藉由使丙烯酸向環氧基進行加成反應而可合成。或是,可舉出包含反應性雙鍵基的基為直接鍵結於構成環氧樹脂的芳香環等的化合物等。
在此,作為具有反應性雙鍵基的環氧化合物(K1)係可舉出以下述式(1)所表示的化合物、以下述式(2)所表示的化合物、或是使丙烯酸向後述的不具有反應性雙鍵基的環氧化合物(K1’)之一部分之環氧基進行加成反應而可得的化合物等。

[式(1)中,R為H-或CH3 -,n為0以上、10以下之整數。]


式(2)中,R為H-或CH3 -,n為0以上、10以下之整數。]
尚,藉由不具有反應性雙鍵基的環氧化合物(K1’)與丙烯酸之反應而可得到的具有反應性雙鍵基的環氧化合物(K1),係有成為與未反應物或環氧基已完全被消耗的化合物之混合物而成的情況,但在本實施形態係實質上包含上述化合物者即可。

(K1’)不具有反應性雙鍵基的環氧化合物
作為不具有反應性雙鍵基的環氧化合物(K1’)係可使用先前一般周知之環氧化合物。作為如此的環氧化合物,具體而言係可舉出多官能環氧樹脂、雙酚A二縮水甘油醚、雙酚A二縮水甘油醚之氫化物、鄰甲酚酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂、二環戊二烯型環氧樹脂、聯苯型環氧樹脂、雙酚A型環氧樹脂、雙酚F型環氧樹脂、伸苯基骨架型環氧樹脂及苯酚酚醛型環氧樹脂等,於分子中具有2官能以上的環氧化合物。此等環氧化合物係可單獨1種、或組合2種以上而使用。
環氧化合物(K1)及(K1’)之數量平均分子量係無特別限制。環氧化合物(K1)及(K1’)之數量平均分子量係各自獨立,由接著劑層之硬化性之觀點、以及接著劑層之硬化後之強度及耐熱性之觀點視之,較佳為300以上、30000以下,更佳為400以上、10000以下,進而佳為500以上、10000以下。又,環氧化合物(K1)及(K1’)之全量[(K1)+(K1’)]中之反應性雙鍵基之含量係相對於環氧化合物(K1)及(K1’)全量中之環氧基100莫耳而言,為0.1莫耳以上、1000莫耳以下,較佳為1莫耳以上、500莫耳以下,進而佳為10莫耳以上、400莫耳以下。若環氧化合物(K1)及(K1’)之全量中之反應性雙鍵基之含量為超過1000莫耳,則有熱硬化性變為不充分的疑慮。在本說明書,數量平均分子量係可作為以將四氫呋喃(THF)設為溶媒的凝膠‧滲透‧層析(GPC)的所得的標準聚苯乙烯換算值而求出。
熱硬化劑係作為對於環氧化合物(K1)及(K1’)的硬化劑而發揮機能。

(K2)具有反應性雙鍵基的熱硬化劑
具有反應性雙鍵基的熱硬化劑(K2)係具有聚合性之碳–碳雙鍵基的熱硬化劑。作為熱硬化劑(K2)所具有的反應性雙鍵基係較佳為可舉出乙烯基、烯丙基及(甲基)丙烯醯基等,更佳為甲基丙烯醯基。
又,熱硬化劑(K2)係除了上述之反應性雙鍵基以外,亦包含可與環氧基反應的官能基。作為可與環氧基反應的官能基係較佳為可舉出酚性羥基、醇性羥基、胺基、羧基及酸酐基等,在此等之中,尤其更佳為酚性羥基、醇性羥基及胺基,進而佳為酚性羥基。
作為具有反應性雙鍵基的熱硬化劑(K2)係例如可舉出將酚樹脂之羥基之一部分,以包含反應性雙鍵基的基取代而成的化合物、或是,包含反應性雙鍵基的基直接鍵結於酚樹脂之芳香環的化合物等。在此,作為酚樹脂係可舉出酚醛清漆型酚樹脂、二環戊二烯型酚樹脂、及多官能系酚樹脂等,特別是酚醛清漆型酚樹脂為較佳。因而,作為具有反應性雙鍵基的熱硬化劑(K2)係可舉出將酚醛清漆型酚樹脂之羥基之一部分,以包含反應性雙鍵基的基取代而成的化合物、或是包含反應性雙鍵基的基直接鍵結於酚醛清漆型酚樹脂之芳香環的化合物等為較佳。
作為具有反應性雙鍵基的熱硬化劑(K2)之特別佳的例子係可舉出如下述式(a)般的在含有酚性羥基的重複單位之一部分導入反應性雙鍵基的構造、如下述式(b)或(c)般的包含具有包含反應性雙鍵基的基的重複單位的化合物。特別佳的具有反應性雙鍵基的熱硬化劑(K2)係包含下述式(a)之重複單位與下述式(b)或(c)之重複單位。

(式(a)中,n為0或1。)

(式(b)及式(c)中,n為各自獨立的0或1。
式(b)及式(c)中,R1 為各自獨立,亦可具有羥基的碳數1以上、5以下之烴基,且,X為各自獨立,有為-O-、 -NR2 -(R2 為氫或甲基)的情況、與R1 X為單鍵的情況,A為(甲基)丙烯醯基。)
重複單位(a)所包含的酚性羥基係可與環氧基反應的官能基,具有作為在接著劑層之熱硬化時與環氧化合物之環氧基進行反應硬化的硬化劑之機能。重複單位(b)及(c)所包含的反應性雙鍵基係使丙烯酸聚合物(J1)與熱硬化性成分(K)之相溶性提昇,同時以反應性雙鍵基相互間進行加成聚合,於接著劑層中形成三維網目構造。此結果,接著劑層之硬化物(硬化接著劑層(保護膜))成為較強韌的性質,由此而半導體裝置之信賴性提昇。又,重複單位(b)及(c)所包含的反應性雙鍵基係亦有在將接著劑層進行能量射線硬化時進行聚合硬化,使接著劑層與基材之接著力降低的作用。
在此熱硬化劑(K2)的以前述(a)式所示的重複單位之比例係較佳為5莫耳%以上、95莫耳%以下,更佳為20莫耳%以上、90莫耳%以下,進而佳為40莫耳%以上、80莫耳%以下,以前述(b)或(c)式所示的重複單位之比例係合計上,較佳為5莫耳%以上、95莫耳%以下,更佳為10莫耳%以上、80莫耳%以下,進而佳為20莫耳%以上、60莫耳%以下。

(K2’)不具有反應性雙鍵基的熱硬化劑
作為不具有反應性雙鍵基的熱硬化劑(K2’),係可舉出於1分子中具有2個以上的可與環氧基反應的官能基的化合物。作為該官能基係可舉出酚性羥基、醇性羥基、胺基、羧基、及酸酐基等。在此等之中,較佳為可舉出酚性羥基、胺基及酸酐基等,進而佳為可舉出酚性羥基及胺基。
具有胺基的熱硬化劑(胺系熱硬化劑)之具體例係可舉出DICY(二氰二胺)。
作為具有酚性羥基的熱硬化劑(酚系熱硬化劑)之具體的例子係可舉出多官能系酚樹脂、聯酚、酚醛清漆型酚樹脂、二環戊二烯系酚樹脂及芳烷基酚樹脂。
不具有反應性雙鍵基的熱硬化劑(K2’)係可單獨1種、或混合2種以上而使用。
上述的熱硬化劑(K2)及(K2’)之數量平均分子量係較佳為40以上、30000以下,更佳為60以上、10000以下,進而佳為80以上、10000以下。
在接著劑層的熱硬化劑(K2)及(K2’)之合計[(K2)及(K2’)]之含量係相對於環氧化合物(K1)及(K1’)之合計[(K1)及(K1’)]之100質量份而言,0.1質量份以上、500質量份以下為較佳,1質量份以上、200質量份以下為更佳。若熱硬化劑之含量少則有硬化不足而無法得到接著性之疑慮。又,熱硬化劑[(K2)及(K2’)]之含量係相對於聚合物成分(J)100質量份而言,1質量份以上、50質量份以下為較佳,2質量份以上、40質量份以下為更佳。若熱硬化劑之含量少則有硬化不足而無法得到接著性之疑慮。
熱硬化性成分(K)(環氧化合物和熱硬化劑之合計[(K1)+(K1’)+(K2)+(K2’)])係在接著劑層之全質量中,較佳為以未達50質量%,更佳為1質量%以上、30質量%以下,進而佳為以5質量%以上、25質量%以下之比例包含。又,於接著劑層係相對於聚合物成分(J)100質量份而言,熱硬化性成分(K)係較佳為包含1質量份以上、未達105質量份,更佳為包含1質量份以上、未達100質量份,進而佳為包含3質量份以上、60質量份以下,特別佳為3質量份以上、40質量份以下之範圍內包含。特別是,在已將熱硬化性成分(K)之含量變少的情況,例如,在相對於聚合物成分(J)100質量份而言,設為3質量份以上、40質量份以下之範圍包含的程度的情況,係可得到以下的效果。使半導體晶片固著於接著劑層,在使接著劑層熱硬化前,即使接著劑層被曝露於高溫,在熱硬化步驟中,亦可使在接著劑層中孔隙產生的可能性降低。若熱硬化性成分(K)之含量過多,則有無法得到充分的接著性的疑慮。

(K3)硬化促進劑
硬化促進劑(K3)係亦可為了調整接著劑層之硬化速度而使用。硬化促進劑(K3),係特別是使用環氧系熱硬化性成分作為熱硬化性成分(K)時被較佳地使用。
作為較佳的硬化促進劑係由3級胺類、咪唑類、有機膦類及四苯硼鹽等所構成的群中選擇的至少一種。作為3級胺類係例如可舉出三亞乙基二胺、苄基二甲基胺、三乙醇胺、二甲基胺基乙醇及參(二甲基胺基甲基)酚等。作為咪唑類係例如可舉出2-甲基咪唑,2-苯基咪唑,2-苯基-4-甲基咪唑,2-苯基-4,5-二羥甲基咪唑及2-苯基-4-甲基-5-羥甲基咪唑等。作為有機膦類係例如可舉出三丁基膦、二苯基膦及三苯基膦等。作為四苯硼鹽係例如可舉出四苯基鏻四苯基硼酸鹽及三苯基膦四苯基硼酸鹽等。硬化促進劑係可單獨1種、或混合2種以上而使用。
在使用硬化促進劑(K3)的情況,硬化促進劑(K3)係相對於熱硬化性成分(K)之合計[(K1)+(K1’)+(K2)+(K2’)]100質量份而言,較佳為以0.01質量份以上、10質量份以下,更佳為以0.1質量份以上、2.5質量份以下之量包含。藉由在上述範圍之量含有硬化促進劑(K3),接著劑層係即使曝露於高溫度且高濕度之條件下,亦具有優異的接著特性。又,藉由在上述範圍之量含有硬化促進劑(K3),在為了將接著劑層形成保護倒裝(face down)型半導體晶片之背面的硬化接著劑層(保護膜)而使用的情況,晶片之背面保護機能優異。若硬化促進劑(K3)之含量少則有硬化不足而無法得到充分的接著特性之疑慮。
於接著劑層係除了具有反應性雙鍵基的黏合劑成分以外,亦可含有以下之成分。

(L)填充材料
接著劑層係亦可含有填充材料(L)。藉由調配填充材料(L)於接著劑層,成為可調整將接著劑層硬化而得到的硬化接著劑層(保護膜)的熱膨脹係數,以對於工件而言最適化硬化接著劑層(保護膜)之熱膨脹係數,可使半導體裝置之信賴性提昇。又,亦成為可使硬化接著劑層(保護膜)之吸濕性降低。
又,將硬化在本實施形態的接著劑層而可得的硬化接著劑層(保護膜),在作為工件或已個片化工件的晶片之保護膜而發揮機能的情況,藉由對保護膜施加雷射標記,在藉由雷射光而已刮取的部分會露出填充材料(L),因為反射光擴散所以呈現接近白色的顏色。因此,若接著劑層含有後述的著色劑(I),則於雷射標記部分與其他部分會得到對比差,有印字變為明暸的效果。
作為較佳的填充材料(L)係可舉出二氧化矽、氧化鋁、滑石、碳酸鈣、氧化鈦、氧化鐵、碳化矽及氮化硼等之粉末,將此等粉末球形化的珠粒、單晶纖維以及玻璃纖維等。在此等填充材料之中,二氧化矽填料及氧化鋁填料為較佳。填充材料(L)係可單獨或混合2種以上而使用。
為了更確實地得到上述之效果,作為填充材料(L)之含量之範圍係在接著劑層之全質量中,較佳為1質量%以上、80質量%以下,更佳為20質量%以上、75質量%以下。尚,在為了將接著劑層形成保護倒裝(face down)型半導體晶片之背面的保護膜而使用的情況,係由使晶片之背面保護機能提昇的觀點視之,填充材料(L)之含量係在接著劑層之全質量中,特別佳為40質量%以上、70質量%以下。
又,在本實施形態的填充材料(L)係藉由具有反應性雙鍵基的化合物而修飾該表面為較佳。在以下,將藉由具有反應性雙鍵基的化合物而修飾該表面的填充材料,記載為「於表面具有反應性雙鍵基的填充材料」。
填充材料(L)所具有的反應性雙鍵基係乙烯基、烯丙基或(甲基)丙烯醯基為較佳。
作為使用在於表面具有反應性雙鍵基的填充材料的未處理之填充材料係除了上述填充材料(L)以外,可舉出矽酸鈣、氫氧化鎂、氫氧化鋁、氧化鈦、滑石、雲母及黏土等。在此等填充材料之中,二氧化矽為較佳。二氧化矽所具有的矽醇基係有效地作用在與後述之矽烷偶合劑之鍵結。
於表面具有反應性雙鍵基的填充材料係例如將未處理之填充材料之表面,藉由具有反應性雙鍵基的偶合劑而進行表面處理而可得。
具有上述反應性雙鍵基的偶合劑係無特別限定。作為該偶合劑,例如具有乙烯基的偶合劑、具有苯乙烯基的偶合劑及具有(甲基)丙烯醯氧基的偶合劑為合適地使用。上述偶合劑係矽烷偶合劑為較佳。
作為上述偶合劑之具體例,可舉出乙烯基三甲氧基矽烷、乙烯基三乙氧基矽烷、p-苯乙烯基三甲氧基矽烷、3-甲基丙烯醯氧基丙基二甲氧基矽烷、3-甲基丙烯醯氧基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-甲基丙烯醯氧基丙基三乙氧基矽烷、3-甲基丙烯醯氧基丙基甲基二乙氧基矽烷及3-丙烯醯氧基丙基三甲氧基矽烷等。作為此等之市售品,例如可舉出KBM-1003、KBE-1003、KBM-1403、KBM-502、KBM-503、KBE-502、KBE-503及KBM-5103(以上均為信越化學工業公司製)。
藉由上述偶合劑而將上述填充材料進行表面處理的方法係無特別限定。作為此方法,例如可舉出於亨舍爾混合機或V型混合機等之可高速攪拌的混合機中添加未處理之填充材料,一邊攪拌一邊將偶合劑,直接或是溶解及分散於醇水溶液、有機溶媒或是水溶液而添加的乾式法。進而,作為其他方法係可舉出於未處理之填充材料之漿液中添加偶合劑的漿液法、及使未處理之填充材料乾燥後,噴霧賦與偶合劑的噴霧法等之直接處理法、或是在上述組成物之調製時,混合未處理之填充材料與丙烯酸系聚合物,在該混合時直接添加偶合劑的整體(integral)摻混法等。
將上述未處理之填充材料100質量份進行表面處理的偶合劑之量之較佳的下限為0.1質量份、較佳的上限為15質量份。若偶合劑之量為未達0.1質量份,則有以上述偶合劑而未處理之填充材料不被充分地進行表面處理而不發揮效果的可能性。
又,於表面具有反應性雙鍵基的填充材料係與具有反應性雙鍵基的黏合劑成分之親和性優異,可均勻地分散於接著劑層中。
於表面具有反應性雙鍵基的填充材料係在接著劑層之全質量中,較佳為以未達50質量%之比例包含,更佳為以1質量%以上、30質量%以下之比例包含,進而佳為以5質量%以上、25質量%以下之比例包含。又,相對於黏合劑成分100質量份而言,於表面具有反應性雙鍵基的填充材料係較佳為在5質量份以上、未達100質量份之範圍包含,更佳為在8質量份以上、60質量份以下之範圍包含,進而佳為在10質量份以上、40質量份以下之範圍包含。若於表面具有反應性雙鍵基的填充材料之量過多,則有向工件之貼附性或向基板之接著性變差的疑慮。若於表面具有反應性雙鍵基的填充材料之量過少,則有該填充材料添加之效果為不被充分地發揮的疑慮。
填充材料(L)之平均粒徑係較佳為在0.01μm以上、10μm以下之範圍內,更佳為在0.01μm以上、0.2μm以下之範圍內。在填充材料之平均粒徑為在上述之範圍內的情況,可不損及與工件之貼附性而發揮接著性。若上述平均粒徑過大,則有薄片之面狀態為惡化且接著劑層之面內厚為散亂的不良狀況產生的可能性。
尚,上述所謂「平均粒徑」係藉由使用了動態光散射法的粒度分布計(日機裝公司製,裝置名;Nanotrac150)而求出。
藉由將填充材料之平均粒徑設為上述範圍,可顯著地得到使封裝信賴性提昇的效果係被推測為因以下之理由所致。
若填充材料之平均粒徑大,則埋在填充材料相互之間的填充材料以外之成分所形成的構造亦變大。填充材料以外之成分係凝聚性低於填充材料。若由填充材料以外之成分所形的構造大,則在斷裂產生於填充材料以外之成分的情況,會擔心斷裂擴大至大範圍。另一方面,若填充材料為微細,則由填充材料以外之成分所形成的構造亦變得微細。那樣的話,即使斷裂產生於填充材料以外之成分,被收進該微細的構造的填充材料為妨礙斷裂之進行。該結果,有斷裂不變大至大範圍的傾向。進而,在本實施形態係填充材料所具有的甲基丙烯醯氧基等之反應性雙鍵基與填充材料以外之成分(例如黏合劑成分)所包含的反應性雙鍵基會產生鍵結。如填充材料為微細,則填充材料與填充材料以外之成分之接觸面積變大。其結果,有填充材料與黏合劑成分之鍵結增加的傾向。

(I)著色劑
於接著劑層係可調配著色劑(I)。以調配著色劑,將半導體裝置裝入機器時,可防止來自周圍之裝置所產生的紅外線等所致的半導體裝置之故障。又,在藉由雷射標記等之手段而進行刻印於硬化接著劑層(保護膜)的情況,有文字及記號等之標記成為容易辨識的效果。亦即,在已形成硬化接著劑層(保護膜)的半導體裝置或半導體晶片係於硬化接著劑層(保護膜)之表面,型號等通常藉由雷射標記法(藉由雷射光而刮取保護膜表面而進行印字的方法)而印字。以硬化接著劑層(保護膜)含有著色劑(I),可充分得到硬化接著劑層(保護膜)之藉由雷射光已刮取的部分與未刮取的部分之對比差,提昇視覺辨認性。
作為著色劑係可使用有機顏料、無機顏料、有機染料及無機染料。作為著色劑係由電磁波及紅外線遮蔽性之觀點視之,黑色顏料為較佳。作為黑色顏料係可使用碳黑、二氧化錳、苯胺黑及活性碳等,但不限定於此。由提昇半導體裝置之信賴性的觀點係碳黑為特別佳。著色劑(I)係可以單獨使用1種,亦可組合2種以上而使用。
著色劑(I)之調配量係在接著劑層之全質量中,較佳為0.1質量%以上、35質量%以下,更佳為0.5質量%以上、25質量%以下,進而佳為1質量%以上、15質量%以下。

(M)偶合劑
亦可將具有與無機物反應的官能基及與有機官能基反應的官能基的偶合劑(M),為了使接著劑層之對於工件的貼附性及接著性提昇,以及為了使接著劑層之凝聚性提昇而使用。又,以使用偶合劑(M),可不損及硬化接著劑層(保護膜)之耐熱性,而使該耐水性提昇。作為如此的偶合劑係可舉出鈦酸鹽系偶合劑、鋁酸鹽系偶合劑及矽烷偶合劑等。在此等偶合劑之中,尤其矽烷偶合劑為較佳。
矽烷偶合劑係將與聚合物成分(J)及熱硬化性成分(K)等所具有的官能基進行反應的基,作為與有機官能基進行反應的官能基具有為較佳。
作為如此的矽烷偶合劑係可舉出具有2個或3個烷氧基的低分子矽烷偶合劑、雙(3-三乙氧基矽烷基丙基)四硫烷、乙烯基三乙醯氧基矽烷以及咪唑矽烷等。作為具有2個或3個烷氧基的低分子矽烷偶合劑係可舉出γ-縮水甘油氧基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、γ-縮水甘油氧基丙基三乙氧基矽烷、γ-縮水甘油氧基丙基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、β-(3,4-環氧環己基)乙基三甲氧基矽烷、γ-(甲基丙烯醯氧基丙基)三甲氧基矽烷、γ-胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、N-6-(胺基乙基)-γ-胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、N-6-(胺基乙基)-γ-胺基丙基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、N-苯基-γ-胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、γ-脲基丙基三乙氧基矽烷、γ-巰基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、γ-巰基丙基甲基二甲氧基矽烷、甲基三甲氧基矽烷、甲基三乙氧基矽烷及乙烯基三甲氧基矽烷等。又,作為矽烷偶合劑係可舉出將上述之具有2個或3個烷氧基的低分子矽烷偶合劑及具有4個烷氧基的低分子矽烷偶合劑等,藉由烷氧基之水解及脫水縮合而縮合的生成物的寡聚物型之矽烷偶合劑。特別是,在上述之低分子矽烷偶合劑之中,具有2個或3個烷氧基的低分子矽烷偶合劑、與具有4個烷氧基的低分子矽烷偶合劑藉由脫水縮合而縮合的生成物的寡聚物為富有烷氧基之反應性,且因為具有充分的數量之有機官能基所以為較佳。作為如此的寡聚物係例如可舉出3-(2,3-環氧丙氧基)丙基甲氧基矽氧烷與二甲氧基矽氧烷之共聚物的寡聚物。
此等矽烷偶合劑係可單獨1種或混合2種以上而使用。
矽烷偶合劑係相對於黏合劑成分100質量份而言,通常,以0.1質量份以上、20質量份以下,較佳為0.2質量份以上、10質量份以下,更佳為0.3質量份以上、5質量份以下之比例包含。若矽烷偶合劑之含量為未達0.1質量份則有無法得到上述之效果的可能性,若超過20質量份則有成為逸出氣體之原因的可能性。

(N)交聯劑
為了調節接著劑層之初期接著力及凝聚力,亦可將交聯劑(N)添加於接著劑層。尚,在調配交聯劑的情況,於前述丙烯酸聚合物(J1)係包含反應性官能基。
作為交聯劑(N)係可舉出有機多元異氰酸酯化合物及有機多元亞胺化合物等。作為交聯劑(N)係可例示與作為日本特開2016-027655號公報所記載之交聯劑(B)而例示的交聯劑相同之交聯劑。
在使用異氰酸酯系之交聯劑的情況,作為反應性官能基使用具有羥基的丙烯酸聚合物(J1)為較佳。若交聯劑為具有異氰酸酯基,丙烯酸聚合物(J1)為具有羥基,則交聯劑與丙烯酸聚合物(J1)之反應會產生,可簡便地導入交聯構造於接著劑層。
在使用交聯劑(N)的情況,交聯劑(N)係相對於丙烯酸聚合物(J1)100質量份而言,通常,以0.01質量份以上、20質量份以下,較佳為0.1質量份以上、10質量份以下,更佳為0.5質量份以上、5質量份以下之比率而使用。

(P)光聚合起始劑
於接著劑層係亦可調配光聚合起始劑(P)。作為光聚合起始劑(P),具體而言可例示與日本特開2016-027655號公報所記載之光聚合起始劑(E)相同之光聚合起始劑。
在使用光聚合起始劑(P)的情況,該搭配比例係根據前述的填充材料(L)之表面之反應性雙鍵基及具有黏合劑成分的反應性雙鍵基之合計量,適宜地設定即可。光聚合起始劑(P)之搭配比例係不被限定。光聚合起始劑(P)之搭配比例係例如相對於具有反應性雙鍵基的聚合物成分、具有反應性雙鍵基的熱硬化性成分、及前述填充材料之合計100質量份而言,光聚合起始劑(P)係通常為0.1質量份以上、10質量份以下,較佳為1質量份以上、5質量份以下。若光聚合起始劑(P)之含量為低於上述範圍則有因光聚合之不足而不能得到滿足的反應的疑慮,若高於上述範圍則產生無助於光聚合的殘留物,有接著劑層之硬化性成為不充分的疑慮。

(M)泛用添加劑
於接著劑層係除了上述以外,按照必要亦可調配各種添加劑。作為各種添加劑係可舉出在第一實施形態說明的泛用添加劑(I)及剝離劑等。
接著劑層係例如使用以適宜之比例混合上述各成分而可得的組成物(第二接著劑組成物)而可得。第二接著劑組成物係事先先以溶媒稀釋,又亦可於混合時加入至溶媒。又,在第二接著劑組成物之使用時,亦可以溶媒稀釋。
作為如此的溶媒係可舉出乙酸乙酯、乙酸甲酯、二乙基醚、二甲基醚、丙酮、甲基乙基酮、乙腈、己烷、環己烷、甲苯及庚烷等。
接著劑層之厚度係較佳為1μm以上、100μm以下,更佳為2μm以上、90μm以下,進而佳為3μm以上、80μm以下。以將接著劑層之厚度設為上述範圍,接著劑層為作為信賴性高的接著劑或保護膜而發揮機能。

(半導體裝置之製造方法)
第3圖(第3A圖~第3D圖)及第4圖(第4A圖~第4D圖)係表示關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法之一例的圖。
在關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係使用具備基材11與接著劑層12的接著層合體1。
接著劑層12係含有由外部接受能量而硬化的硬化型接著劑為較佳。作為由外部供給的能量係例如可舉出紫外線、電子束及熱等。接著劑層12係含有紫外線硬化型接著劑及熱硬化型接著劑之至少任一種為較佳。在本實施形態,作為含有於接著劑層12的接著劑係例如前述之第二接著劑組成物為較佳。

‧半導體晶片貼附步驟
於第3A圖係表示說明使半導體晶片CP貼附於接著層合體1之接著劑層12的步驟(半導體晶片貼附步驟)的剖面概略圖。在本實施形態係如第3A圖所示之方式,使複數之半導體晶片CP貼附於接著劑層12。在使半導體晶片CP貼附時係可1個個地貼附,亦可使複數之半導體晶片CP同時貼附。
在本實施形態使用的半導體晶片CP係具有連接端子W3所設置的電路面W1、和作為與電路面W1係相反側之元件背面之晶片背面W2。在本實施形態係使電路面W1貼附於接著劑層12。

‧補強框架貼附步驟
在本實施形態亦與第1實施形態相同,更具有於接著層合體1貼附補強框架2的步驟(補強框架貼附步驟)為較佳(參照第3A圖)。補強框架2之形狀係無特別限定,作為補強框架2之例示係與第1實施形態相同。
在本實施形態亦與第1實施形態相同,貼附補強框架2的步驟係可在使半導體晶片CP貼附於接著層合體1的步驟之前實施,亦可在之後實施。

‧接著劑層硬化步驟
於第3B圖係表示說明使接著劑層12硬化而形成硬化接著劑層12A的步驟(接著劑層硬化步驟)的剖面概略圖。藉由使接著劑層12硬化,半導體晶片CP係藉由硬化接著劑層12A而強固地接著,可抑制在之後之樹脂密封步驟的半導體晶片CP之移動。
使接著劑層12硬化的方法係與第1實施形態相同,按照接著劑層12含有的接著劑之種類而適宜地選擇為較佳。
在本實施形態亦因為補強框架2被貼附於接著劑層12,所以可抑制因接著劑層12硬化時之收縮所致的接著層合體1之撓曲及捲曲。因而,在使接著劑層12硬化而形成硬化接著劑層12A的步驟之前,先使補強框架2貼附於接著劑層12為較佳。

‧密封步驟
於第3C圖係表示說明硬化接著劑層12A之形成後,密封複數之半導體晶片CP的步驟(密封步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態,係將半導體晶片CP之晶片背面W2側藉由密封構件30而被覆而形成密封體3A。於複數之半導體晶片CP之間亦填充密封構件30。在本實施形態係因為補強框架2亦被拿進密封體3A之內部,所以密封體3A之剛性提昇,可抑制在樹脂密封後產生的半導體封裝之彎曲。
使用密封構件30而密封複數之半導體晶片CP的方法係無特別限定,例如可舉出在第1實施形態已說明的方法等。
作為密封構件30之材質係例如可舉出在第1實施形態已說明的材料或組成物等。
在本實施形態亦可實施在第1實施形態已說明的追加之硬化步驟。

‧基材剝離步驟
於第3D圖係表示說明在密封複數之半導體晶片CP之後,剝離接著層合體1之基材11的步驟(基材剝離步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態亦就將硬化接著劑層12A留在密封體3A的態樣,從密封體3A剝離基材11。

‧連接端子露出步驟
於第4A圖係表示說明於密封體3A之表面使半導體晶片CP之連接端子W3露出的步驟(連接端子露出步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態係除去被覆半導體晶片CP之電路面W1或連接端子W3的密封體3A之硬化接著劑層12A之一部分或全體而使連接端子W3露出。使半導體晶片CP之連接端子W3露出的方法係無特別限定。作為使半導體晶片CP之連接端子W3露出的方法係例如可舉出藉由雷射照射等之方法而除去硬化接著劑層12A而使連接端子W3露出的方法、以及藉由蝕刻法而除去硬化接著劑層12A而使連接端子W3露出的方法等。在本實施形態,亦如與後述的再配線層可電性連接,則可使連接端子W3之全體露出,亦可使連接端子W3之一部分露出。

‧再配線層形成步驟
於第4B圖係表示說明形成與半導體晶片CP電性連接的再配線層4的步驟(再配線層形成步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態係使再配線層4、與露出於密封體3A之表面的連接端子W3進行電性連接。在本實施形態係將再配線層4,形成於電路面W1之上、及密封體3A之面3S之上。形成再配線層4的方法係可採用先前一般周知之方法。
再配線層4係具有用以使外部端子電極連接之外部電極墊41。在本實施形態,外部電極墊41係形成於複數處所。在本實施形態,亦形成扇出(Fan-Out)於半導體晶片CP之區域外的外部電極墊41。

‧外部端子電極連接步驟
於第4C圖係表示說明使外部端子電極5電性連接於再配線層4的步驟(外部端子電極連接步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態係於外部電極墊41,載置銲球等之外部端子電極5,藉由焊接等,使外部端子電極5與外部電極墊41電性連接。銲球之材質係無特別限定,例如可舉出含鉛焊料、及無鉛焊料等。

‧單片化步驟
於第4D圖係表示說明將已連接外部端子電極5的密封體3A單片化的步驟(單片化步驟)的剖面概略圖。
將密封體3A單片化的方法係無特別限定,例如可舉出與第1實施形態相同之方法。將密封體3A單片化的步驟,係亦可使密封體3A貼附於切割薄片等之黏著薄片而實施。
在本實施形態,係藉由以包含複數之半導體晶片CP之方式將密封體3A單片化,製造包含複數之半導體晶片CP的半導體封裝100A。在半導體封裝100A係硬化接著劑層12A被設置於半導體晶片CP之電路面W1。亦即,接著層合體1之接著劑層12係並非於樹脂密封後被剝離的暫時固定用,而是作為硬化接著劑層12A強固地接著於半導體晶片CP而被包含作為半導體封裝100A之一部分。
在本實施形態,因為使外部端子電極5連接於扇出(Fan-Out)至半導體晶片CP之區域外的外部電極墊41,所以半導體封裝100A係可使用作為扇出型之晶圓等級封裝(FO-WLP)。

‧安裝步驟
本實施形態之半導體裝置之製造方法係包含將半導體封裝100A安裝於印刷電路板等的步驟(有稱為安裝步驟的情況。)亦為較佳。

‧實施形態之效果
藉由關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法,則與第1實施形態相同,相較於如文獻1所記載般的使用黏著膠帶的方法,可抑制因樹脂密封時之壓力而半導體晶片CP從指定之位置偏移的不良狀況,可簡化製造步驟。
又,硬化接著劑層12A係因為具有剛性,所以密封體3A之剛性提昇,可抑制在樹脂密封後產生的半導體封裝之彎曲。

[第3實施形態]
關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係使用接著層合體的製造方法,該接著層合體包含基材與接著劑層,在前述接著劑層與前述基材之間,進而包含黏著劑層。關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係具有:於如此的接著層合體之前述接著劑層,貼附複數之前述半導體元件的步驟、使前述接著劑層硬化而形成硬化接著劑層的步驟、密封複數之前述半導體元件而形成具有密封樹脂層的密封體的步驟、不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層而由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟、形成與前述半導體元件電性連接的再配線層的步驟、使外部端子電極電性連接於前述再配線層的步驟。
由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟係不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層,而是在前述黏著劑層與前述硬化接著劑層之界面剝離的步驟為較佳。

(接著層合體)
在關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係使用具備基材11、接著劑層12與黏著劑層13的接著層合體1A(參照第5A圖)。

(基材)
基材11係無特別限定,例如,可使用與在第1實施形態已說明的基材同樣之基材。

(接著劑層)
接著劑層12係含有由外部接受能量而硬化的硬化型接著劑為較佳。作為由外部供給的能量係例如可舉出紫外線、電子束及熱等。接著劑層12係含有紫外線硬化型接著劑及熱硬化型接著劑之至少任一種為較佳。在本實施形態,作為含有於接著劑層12的接著劑係例如前述之第一接著劑組成物及前述之第二接著劑組成物之至少任一之接著劑組成物為較佳。

(黏著劑層)
黏著劑層13係被包含於基材11與接著劑層12之間。在接著層合體1A,接著劑層12係被層合於已設置在基材11的黏著劑層13之上。
黏著劑層13係亦可以具有可剝離接著劑層12的程度之黏著力的弱黏著性之黏著劑形成,且亦可以藉由能量射線照射而黏著力降低的能量射線硬化性之黏著劑形成。又,在使用以能量射線硬化性之黏著劑形成的黏著劑層的情況,對於接著劑層12被層合的區域(例如,基材11之內周部)事先進行能量射線照射,使黏著性降低,對於其他區域(例如,基材11之外周部)係不進行能量射線照射,例如將向治具之接著作為目的,亦可先高度地維持黏著力。以僅對其他區域不進行能量射線照射之方式進行係例如,在對應於基材11之其他區域的區域,藉由印刷等而設置能量射線遮蔽層,由基材11側進行能量射線照射即可。
黏著劑層13係藉由先前一般周知之各式各樣之黏著劑而可形成。黏著劑層13係例如藉由自泛用黏著劑、能量射線硬化型黏著劑及含熱膨脹成分之黏著劑所構成的群中選擇至少任一之黏著劑而可形成。作為泛用黏著劑係例如由橡膠系黏著劑、丙烯酸系黏著劑、聚矽氧系黏著劑、胺基甲酸酯系黏著劑及乙烯基醚系黏著劑所構成的群中選擇的至少任一之黏著劑為較佳。又,作為黏著劑層13之形態係亦包含具有芯材、與已設置於芯材之兩面的黏著劑層的形態。
又,黏著劑層13係熱膨脹性黏著劑層亦為較佳。熱膨脹性黏著劑層係以熱膨脹性黏著劑形成。熱膨脹性黏著劑係含有黏著劑與熱膨脹性成分。在黏著劑層13為熱膨脹性黏著劑層的情況,藉由加熱,使熱膨脹性黏著劑層與被黏物之接觸面積減少,可使黏著力降低。作為熱膨脹性成分係可使用熱膨脹性微粒子。熱膨脹性微粒子係例如使藉由加熱而容易氣化而膨脹的物質,內包於具有彈性的殼內的微粒子。作為氣化而膨脹的物質係例如可舉出異丁烷、丙烷及戊烷等。特別是,熱膨脹性微粒子係於加熱膨脹後容易控制黏著劑層之表面形狀,藉由此而使黏著劑層由強黏著性之狀態,藉由加熱而容易地變化為容易剝離的狀態,所以為較佳。又,作為熱膨脹性成分係亦可使用發泡劑。發泡劑係例如進行熱分解,具有使氣體產生的能力的化學物質。作為產生的氣體係例如可舉出水、碳酸氣體及氮等。藉由使發泡劑分散於黏著劑中,顯現出與熱膨脹性微粒子類似之效果。
黏著劑層13之厚度係無特別限定。黏著劑層13之厚度係通常為1μm以上、50μm以下,5μm以上、30μm以下為較佳。

(半導體裝置之製造方法)
第5圖(第5A圖~第5E圖)係表示關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法之一例的圖。
在關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係使用接著層合體1A。

‧半導體晶片貼附步驟
於第5A圖係表示說明使半導體晶片CP貼附於接著層合體1A之接著劑層12的步驟(半導體晶片貼附步驟)的剖面概略圖。在本實施形態係如第5B圖所示之方式,使複數之半導體晶片CP貼附於接著劑層12。在使半導體晶片CP貼附時係可1個個地貼附,亦可使複數之半導體晶片CP同時貼附。
在本實施形態使用的半導體晶片CP係具有連接端子W3所設置的電路面W1、和作為與電路面W1係相反側之元件背面之晶片背面W2。在本實施形態係使晶片背面W2貼附於接著劑層12。

‧補強框架貼附步驟
在本實施形態亦與第1實施形態相同,更具有於接著層合體1A貼附補強框架2的步驟(補強框架貼附步驟)為較佳(參照第5A圖及第5B圖)。補強框架2之形狀係無特別限定,作為補強框架2之例示係與第1實施形態相同。
在本實施形態,貼附補強框架2的步驟係亦與第1實施形態相同,可在使半導體晶片CP貼附於接著層合體1A的步驟之前實施,亦可在使半導體晶片CP貼附於接著層合體1A的步驟之後實施。

‧接著劑層硬化步驟
於第5C圖係表示說明使接著劑層12硬化而形成硬化接著劑層12A的步驟(接著劑層硬化步驟)的剖面概略圖。藉由使接著劑層12硬化,半導體晶片CP係藉由硬化接著劑層12A而強固地接著,可抑制在之後之樹脂密封步驟的半導體晶片CP之移動。
使接著劑層12硬化的方法係與第1實施形態相同,按照接著劑層12含有的接著劑之種類而適宜地選擇為較佳。
在本實施形態亦因為補強框架2被貼附於接著劑層12,所以可抑制因接著劑層12硬化時之收縮所致的接著層合體1A之撓曲及捲曲。因而,在使接著劑層12硬化而形成硬化接著劑層12A的步驟之前,先使補強框架2貼附於接著劑層12為較佳。

‧密封步驟
於第5D圖係表示說明硬化接著劑層12A之形成後,密封複數之半導體晶片CP的步驟(密封步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態,係將半導體晶片CP之電路面W1側藉由密封構件30而被覆而形成密封體3。於複數之半導體晶片CP之間亦填充密封構件30。在本實施形態係因為補強框架2亦被拿進密封體3之內部,所以密封體3之剛性提昇,可抑制在樹脂密封後產生的半導體封裝之彎曲。
使用密封構件30而密封複數之半導體晶片CP的方法係無特別限定,例如可舉出在第1實施形態已說明的方法等。作為密封構件30之材質係例如可舉出在第1實施形態已說明的材料或組成物等。
在本實施形態亦可實施在第1實施形態已說明的追加之硬化步驟。尚,亦可不實施追加之硬化步驟而是藉由在密封步驟的加熱而使密封構件30充分地硬化。

‧剝離步驟
於第5E圖係表示說明在密封複數之半導體晶片CP之後,剝離接著層合體1A之基材11及黏著劑層13的步驟(有稱為剝離步驟的情況。)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態係就將硬化接著劑層12A留在密封體3的態樣,從密封體3剝離基材11及黏著劑層13。接著層合體1A係在黏著劑層13與硬化接著劑層12A之界面可剝離。
在基材剝離步驟之後,例如,以與第一實施形態相同地實施連接端子露出步驟(參照第2A圖)、再配線層形成步驟(參照第2B圖)、外部端子電極連接步驟(參照第2C圖)及單片化步驟(參照第2D圖),可製造半導體封裝100。在本實施形態之半導體裝置之製造方法,進而亦可實施安裝步驟。

‧實施形態之效果
藉由關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法,則顯現出與第一實施形態同樣之效果。
又,藉由關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法,則接著層合體1A係因為在基材11與接著劑層12之間包含黏著劑層13,所以在使接著劑層硬化的步驟,可抑制自接著劑層之基材之浮起。

[第4實施形態]
關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係使用具備基材與黏著劑層的黏著薄片,以及具備接著劑層的半導體元件的製造方法。
關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係具有:於黏著薄片之前述黏著劑層,貼合複數之前述半導體元件之前述接著劑層的步驟、使前述接著劑層硬化而形成硬化接著劑層的步驟、密封複數之前述半導體元件而形成具有密封樹脂層的密封體的步驟、不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層而由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟、形成與前述半導體元件電性連接的再配線層的步驟、使外部端子電極電性連接於前述再配線層的步驟。
由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟係不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層,而是在前述黏著劑層與前述硬化接著劑層之界面剝離的步驟為較佳。
尚,在本說明書中,黏著薄片係在貼附於被黏物後具有可剝離的黏著力,與具有如接著劑層般的強固地被固定於被黏物的接著力的接著薄片係相異。

(黏著薄片)
在關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係使用具備基材11與黏著劑層13的黏著薄片1B(參照第6A圖)。

(基材)
基材11係無特別限定,例如,可使用與在第1實施形態已說明的基材同樣之基材。

(黏著劑層)
黏著劑層13係被設置於基材11。黏著劑層13,可使用與在第3實施形態已說明的黏著劑層同樣之黏著劑層。

(半導體裝置之製造方法)
第6圖(第6A圖~第6E圖)及第7圖(第7A圖~第7D圖)係表示關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法之一例的圖。
在關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係使用黏著薄片1B。

‧半導體晶片貼附步驟
於第6A圖係表示說明使半導體晶片CP貼附於黏著薄片1B之黏著劑層13的步驟(半導體晶片貼附步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態使用的半導體晶片CP係具有連接端子W3所設置的電路面W1、和作為與電路面W1係相反側之元件背面之晶片背面W2。接著劑層14係被設置於半導體晶片CP之晶片背面W2。作為含有於接著劑層14的接著劑係例如前述之第一接著劑組成物及前述之第二接著劑組成物之至少任一之接著劑組成物為較佳。
在本實施形態係如第6B圖所示之方式,隔著接著劑層14而使複數之半導體晶片CP貼附於黏著薄片1B之黏著劑層13。在使半導體晶片CP貼附時係可1個個地貼附,亦可使複數之半導體晶片CP同時貼附。

‧補強框架貼附步驟
在本實施形態係更具有於黏著薄片1B貼附補強框架2的步驟(補強框架貼附步驟)為較佳(參照第6A圖及第6B圖)。藉由將補強框架2貼附於黏著薄片1B,在半導體裝置之製造方法之製程中的使半導體晶片CP貼附的黏著薄片1B之操作性等為提昇。
補強框架2之形狀係無特別限定,作為補強框架2之例示係與第1實施形態相同。
在本實施形態,貼附補強框架2的步驟係,可在使半導體晶片CP貼附於黏著薄片1B的步驟之前實施,亦可在使半導體晶片CP貼附於黏著薄片1B的步驟之後實施。

‧接著劑層硬化步驟
於第6C圖係表示說明使接著劑層14硬化而形成硬化接著劑層14A的步驟(接著劑層硬化步驟)的剖面概略圖。藉由使接著劑層14硬化,半導體晶片CP係藉由硬化接著劑層14A而強固地接著,可抑制在之後之樹脂密封步驟的半導體晶片CP之移動。
使接著劑層14硬化的方法係與第1實施形態相同,按照接著劑層14含有的接著劑之種類而適宜地選擇為較佳。
在本實施形態亦因為補強框架2被貼附於黏著薄片1B,所以可抑制因接著劑層14硬化時之收縮所致的黏著薄片1B之撓曲及捲曲。因而,在使接著劑層14硬化而形成硬化接著劑層14A的步驟之前,先使補強框架2貼附於黏著劑層13為較佳。

‧密封步驟
於第6D圖係表示說明硬化接著劑層14A之形成後,密封複數之半導體晶片CP的步驟(密封步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態,係將半導體晶片CP之電路面W1側藉由密封構件30而被覆而形成密封體3B。於複數之半導體晶片CP之間亦填充密封構件30。在本實施形態係因為補強框架2及硬化接著劑層14A被放進密封體3B之內部,所以密封體3B之剛性提昇,可抑制在樹脂密封後產生的半導體封裝之彎曲。使用密封構件30而密封複數之半導體晶片CP的方法係無特別限定,例如可舉出在第1實施形態已說明的方法等。作為密封構件30之材質係例如可舉出在第1實施形態已說明的材料或組成物等。
在本實施形態亦可實施在第1實施形態已說明的追加之硬化步驟。尚,亦可不實施追加之硬化步驟而是藉由在密封步驟的加熱而使密封構件30充分地硬化。

‧黏著薄片剝離步驟
於第6E圖係表示說明在密封複數之半導體晶片CP之後,剝離黏著薄片1B的步驟(有稱為黏著薄片剝離步驟的情況。)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態係就將硬化接著劑層14A留在密封體3B的態樣,從密封體3B剝離黏著薄片1B(基材11及黏著劑層13)。黏著薄片1B係在黏著劑層13與硬化接著劑層14A之界面可剝離。

‧連接端子露出步驟
於第7A圖係表示說明於密封體3B表面使半導體晶片CP之連接端子W3露出的步驟(連接端子露出步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態係除去被覆半導體晶片CP之電路面W1或連接端子W3的密封體3B之密封樹脂層之一部分或全體而使連接端子W3露出。本實施形態之連接端子露出步驟係可與第一實施形態以同樣之方式進行而實施。

‧再配線層形成步驟
於第7B圖係表示說明形成與半導體晶片CP電性連接的再配線層4的步驟(再配線層形成步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態係使再配線層4、與露出於密封體3B之表面的連接端子W3進行電性連接。本實施形態之再配線層形成步驟係可與第一實施形態以同樣之方式進行而實施。
本實施形態之再配線層4亦具有用以使外部端子電極連接之外部電極墊41。在本實施形態,外部電極墊41亦形成於複數處所。在本實施形態,亦形成扇出(Fan-Out)於半導體晶片CP之區域外的外部電極墊41。

‧外部端子電極連接步驟
於第7C圖係表示說明使外部端子電極5電性連接於再配線層4的步驟(外部端子電極連接步驟)的剖面概略圖。本實施形態之外部端子電極連接步驟係可與第一實施形態以同樣之方式進行而實施。

‧單片化步驟
於第7D圖係表示說明將已連接外部端子電極5的密封體3B單片化的步驟(單片化步驟)的剖面概略圖。
將密封體3B單片化的方法係無特別限定,例如可舉出與第1實施形態相同之方法。將密封體3B單片化的步驟,係亦可使密封體3B貼附於切割薄片等之黏著薄片而實施。
在本實施形態,係藉由以包含複數之半導體晶片CP之方式將密封體3B單片化,製造包含複數之半導體晶片CP的半導體封裝100C。在半導體封裝100C係硬化接著劑層14A被設置於半導體晶片CP之晶片背面W2。亦即,被設置於半導體晶片CP之晶片背面W2的接著劑層14係並非於樹脂密封後被剝離的暫時固定用,而是作為硬化接著劑層14A強固地接著於半導體晶片CP而包含作為半導體封裝100C之一部分。
在本實施形態,亦因為使外部端子電極5連接於扇出(Fan-Out)至半導體晶片CP之區域外的外部電極墊41,所以半導體封裝100C係可使用作為扇出型之晶圓等級封裝(FO-WLP)。

‧安裝步驟
本實施形態之半導體裝置之製造方法係包含將半導體封裝100C安裝於印刷電路板等的步驟(有稱為安裝步驟的情況。)亦較佳。

‧實施形態之效果
藉由關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法,則顯現出與第一實施形態同樣之效果。
又,藉由關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法,則半導體晶片CP係隔著已設置在晶片背面W2的接著劑層14而貼附於黏著薄片1B,所以即使是先製作在被單片化為晶片狀之前之晶圓全面已層合接著劑層的層合體的狀態亦可使用。

[第5實施形態]
關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係使用接著層合體的製造方法,該接著層合體具備基材與接著劑層,前述接著劑層為包含第一接著劑層與第二接著劑層。所謂前述第一接著劑層與前述第二接著劑層係材質為互相相異。在本實施形態係將於前述基材之上形成前述第二接著劑層,於前述第二接著劑層之上形成前述第一接著劑層的接著層合體,舉為例子而說明。在本實施形態,作為接著層合體之基材係例如可使用樹脂薄膜。
關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係具有:貼附硬質支撐體於前述第一接著劑層的步驟、將前述基材自前述第二接著劑層剝離的步驟、貼附複數之半導體元件於前述第二接著劑層的步驟、使前述第一接著劑層硬化而形成第一硬化接著劑層與使前述第二接著劑層硬化而形成第二硬化接著劑層的步驟、密封複數之前述半導體元件而形成具有密封樹脂層的密封體的步驟、形成與前述半導體元件電性連接的再配線層的步驟、使外部端子電極電性連接於前述再配線層的步驟、不由前述密封體剝離前述第二硬化接著劑層,而是除去前述第一硬化接著劑層及前述硬質支撐體的步驟;在貼附複數之前述半導體元件於前述接著層合體時,將與前述半導體元件之具有連接端子的電路面係相反側之元件背面,朝向前述接著劑層而貼附,在密封前述半導體元件而形成前述密封體後,除去覆蓋前述電路面的前述密封樹脂層之一部分或全體而使前述連接端子露出,使前述再配線層電性連接於已露出的前述連接端子。
在將前述基材由第二接著劑層剝離的步驟係在前述基材與前述第二接著劑層之界面進行剝離為較佳。
以相同步驟使第一接著劑層與第二接著劑層硬化為較佳,同時使之硬化為更佳。

(接著層合體)
在關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係使用具備基材11、第一接著劑層15與第二接著劑層16的接著層合體1C(參照第8A圖)。接著層合體1C係在基材11與第一接著劑層15之間,包含第二接著劑層16。

(基材)
基材11係無特別限定,例如,可使用與在第1實施形態已說明的基材同樣之基材。在本實施形態,基材11係具有可撓性的材質為較佳。在本實施形態係將作為基材11使用樹脂薄膜的情況舉為例子而說明。

(接著劑層)
第一接著劑層15及第二接著劑層16係含有由外部接受能量而硬化的硬化型接著劑為較佳。作為由外部供給的能量係例如可舉出紫外線、電子束及熱等。第一接著劑層15及第二接著劑層16係各自獨立,含有紫外線硬化型接著劑及熱硬化型接著劑之至少任一種為較佳。在本實施形態,作為被含有於第一接著劑層15的接著劑及被含有於第二接著劑層16的接著劑係各自獨立,例如係前述之第一接著劑組成物及前述之第二接著劑組成物之至少任一之接著劑組成物為較佳。又,第一接著劑層15及第二接著劑層16係紫外線硬化型接著劑層為較佳。在第一接著劑層15及第二接著劑層16為紫外線硬化型接著劑層的情況,硬質支撐體17係以可透過紫外線的材質形成為較佳。

(半導體裝置之製造方法)
第8圖(第8A圖~第8E圖)及第9圖(第9A圖~第9E圖)係表示關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法之一例的圖。
在關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法係使用接著層合體1C。

‧硬質支撐體貼附步驟
於第8A圖係表示說明貼附硬質支撐體17於第一接著劑層15的步驟(硬質支撐體貼附步驟)的剖面概略圖。
硬質支撐體17之材質係考慮機械上的強度、及耐熱性等而適宜決定即可。硬質支撐體17之材質係例如可舉出金屬材料、非金屬無機材料、樹脂材料及複合材料等。作為金屬材料係例如可舉出SUS等。作為非金屬無機材料係例如可舉出玻璃及矽晶圓等。作為樹脂材料係例如可舉出環氧樹脂、ABS、丙烯酸、工程塑膠、超級工程塑膠、聚醯亞胺及聚醯胺醯亞胺等。作為複合材料係例如可舉出玻璃環氧樹脂等。在此等之材質之中,尤其是SUS、玻璃及矽晶圓等為較佳。作為工程塑膠係可舉出尼龍、聚碳酸酯(PC)及聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯(PET)等。作為超級工程塑膠係可舉出聚苯硫(PPS)、聚醚碸(PES)及聚醚醚酮(PEEK)等。
硬質支撐體17之厚度係考慮機械上的強度及操作性等而適宜決定即可。硬質支撐體17之厚度係例如為100μm以上、50mm以下。
在本實施形態係因為第二接著劑層16、及第一接著劑層15為被貼附於硬質支撐體17,所以在半導體裝置之製造方法之製程中的半導體晶片CP之操作性等提昇。

‧基材剝離步驟
於第8B圖係表示說明在硬質支撐體貼附步驟之後,由接著層合體1C剝離基材11的步驟(基材剝離步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在關於本實施形態的製造方法,接著層合體1C係在第二接著劑層16與基材11之界面為可剝離。

‧半導體晶片貼附步驟
於第8C圖係表示說明使半導體晶片CP貼附於以剝離基材11而露出的第二接著劑層16的步驟(半導體晶片貼附步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態使用的半導體晶片CP係具有連接端子W3所設置的電路面W1、和作為與電路面W1係相反側之元件背面之晶片背面W2。
在本實施形態係如第8C圖所示之方式,使複數之半導體晶片CP貼附於第二接著劑層16。在使半導體晶片CP貼附時係可1個個地貼附,亦可使複數之半導體晶片CP同時貼附。

‧接著劑層硬化步驟
於第8D圖係表示說明使第一接著劑層15硬化而形成第一硬化接著劑層15A,使第二接著劑層16硬化而形成第二硬化接著劑層16A的步驟(接著劑層硬化步驟)的剖面概略圖。藉由使第二接著劑層16硬化,半導體晶片CP係藉由第二硬化接著劑層16A而強固地接著,可抑制在之後之樹脂密封步驟的半導體晶片CP之移動。
使第一接著劑層15及第二接著劑層16硬化的方法係與第1實施形態相同,按照第一接著劑層15及第二接著劑層16含有的接著劑之種類而適宜地選擇為較佳。在以第一接著劑層15及第二接著劑層16為相同硬化方式之接著劑構成的情況係使第一接著劑層15及第二接著劑層16同時硬化為較佳。
在將第二硬化接著劑層16A,作為用以保護晶片背面之保護膜而利用的情況,此保護膜係被著色為較佳,黑色為更佳。因此,於第二接著劑層16係調配前述之著色劑為較佳。

‧密封步驟
於第8E圖係表示說明第一硬化接著劑層15A及第二硬化接著劑層16A之形成後,密封複數之半導體晶片CP的步驟(密封步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態,係將半導體晶片CP之電路面W1側藉由密封構件30而被覆而形成密封體3。於複數之半導體晶片CP之間亦填充密封構件30。在本實施形態係因為硬質支撐體17被貼附於密封體3,所以密封體3之剛性提昇,可抑制在樹脂密封後產生的半導體封裝之彎曲。使用密封構件30而密封複數之半導體晶片CP的方法係無特別限定,例如可舉出在第1實施形態已說明的方法等。作為密封構件30之材質係例如可舉出在第1實施形態已說明的材料或組成物等。
在本實施形態亦可實施在第1實施形態已說明的追加之硬化步驟。尚,亦可不實施追加之硬化步驟而是藉由在密封步驟的加熱而使密封構件30充分地硬化。

‧連接端子露出步驟
於第9A圖係表示說明於密封體3表面使半導體晶片CP之連接端子W3露出的步驟(連接端子露出步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態係除去被覆半導體晶片CP之電路面W1或連接端子W3的密封體3之密封樹脂層之一部分或全體而使連接端子W3露出。本實施形態之連接端子露出步驟係可與第一實施形態以同樣之方式進行而實施。

‧再配線層形成步驟
於第9B圖係表示說明形成與半導體晶片CP電性連接的再配線層4的步驟(再配線層形成步驟)的剖面概略圖。
在本實施形態係使再配線層4與露出於密封體3之表面的連接端子W3進行電性連接。本實施形態之再配線層形成步驟係可與第一實施形態以同樣之方式進行而實施。
本實施形態之再配線層4亦具有用以使外部端子電極連接之外部電極墊41。在本實施形態,外部電極墊41亦形成於複數處所。在本實施形態,亦形成扇出(Fan-Out)於半導體晶片CP之區域外的外部電極墊41。

‧外部端子電極連接步驟
於第9C圖係表示說明使外部端子電極5電性連接於再配線層4的步驟(外部端子電極連接步驟)的剖面概略圖。本實施形態之外部端子電極連接步驟係可與第一實施形態以同樣之方式進行而實施。

‧除去步驟
於第9D圖係表示說明除去硬質支撐體17的步驟(除去步驟)的剖面概略圖。在本實施形態係進而亦除去第一硬化接著劑層15A,使第二硬化接著劑層16A露出。亦可將第二硬化接著劑層16A,作為用以保護晶片背面之保護膜而利用。作為保護膜之第二硬化接著劑層16A之表面係亦可藉由雷射標記等而施加印字。

‧單片化步驟
於第9E圖係表示說明將已連接外部端子電極5的密封體3單片化的步驟(單片化步驟)的剖面概略圖。
將密封體3單片化的方法係無特別限定,例如可舉出與第1實施形態相同之方法。將密封體3單片化的步驟,係亦可使密封體3貼附於切割薄片等之黏著薄片而實施。
在本實施形態,係藉由以包含複數之半導體晶片CP之方式將密封體3單片化,製造包含複數之半導體晶片CP的半導體封裝100。在半導體封裝100係第二硬化接著劑層16A被設置於半導體晶片CP之晶片背面W2。亦即,被設置於半導體晶片CP之晶片背面W2的第二接著劑層16係並非於樹脂密封後被剝離的暫時固定用,而是作為第二硬化接著劑層16A被強固地接著於半導體晶片CP而被包含作為半導體封裝100之一部分。
在本實施形態,亦因為使外部端子電極5連接於扇出(Fan-Out)至半導體晶片CP之區域外的外部電極墊41,所以半導體封裝100係可使用作為扇出型之晶圓等級封裝(FO-WLP)。

‧安裝步驟
本實施形態之半導體裝置之製造方法係包含將半導體封裝100安裝於印刷電路板等的步驟(有稱為安裝步驟的情況。)亦較佳。

‧實施形態之效果
藉由關於本實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法,則因為硬質支撐體17被貼附於第一接著劑層15,所以可確保硬質支撐體17與第一接著劑層15之接著性,抑制在密封時的半導體晶片CP之位置偏移。又,可將第二硬化接著劑層16A,作為最後殘留於晶片背面的保護膜而利用。因為可以同一步驟形成具有抑制位置偏移機能及保護機能的第一硬化接著劑層15A與第二硬化接著劑層16A,所以可簡化製造步驟。

[實施形態之變形]
本發明係不因上述之實施形態而受到任何限定。本發明係在可達成本發明之目的的範圍,包含將上述之實施形態變形的態樣等。
例如,在半導體晶圓或半導體晶片的電路等係不限定於已圖示的配列或形狀等。與在半導體封裝的外部端子電極之連接構造等,亦不限定於在前述之實施形態說明的態樣。在前述之實施形態係將製造FO-WLP型之半導體封裝的態樣舉為例子而說明,但本發明係亦可適用於製造扇入型之WLP等之其他之半導體封裝的態樣。
在前述實施形態係將藉由以包含複數之半導體晶片之方式,將密封體單片化,製造包含複數之半導體晶片的半導體封裝的態樣,舉為例子而說明,但本發明係不限定於如此的態樣。例如,單片化步驟係亦可以各自之半導體封裝為以一個個包含半導體晶片等之半導體元件之方式,將密封體單片化的態樣。又,例如,單片化步驟係亦可以各自之半導體封裝為包含3個以上半導體晶片等之半導體元件之方式,將密封體單片化的態樣。
在前述實施形態係將隔著已層合的接著劑層而貼附半導體元件於基材的態樣,舉為例子而說明,但接著劑層之層合數係不限定於2層,亦可為3層以上。
在前述實施形態係將已層合接著劑層於基材的接著層合體舉為例子而說明,但本發明係不限定於如此的態樣。作為其他實施形態係例如亦可於半導體晶片等之半導體元件,層合接著劑層的態樣。在此態樣之情況,半導體元件係亦可隔著元件背面之接著劑層,貼附於基材,且亦可隔著元件背面之接著劑層與黏著薄片之黏著劑層,貼附於黏著薄片。被層合於半導體元件的接著劑層之層合數係不限定於2層,亦可為3層以上。
A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an embodiment of the present invention uses an adhesive laminate. The next lamination system includes a substrate and an adhesive layer. In this specification, the adhesive lamination system is not an adhesive sheet (temporary fixing sheet) that is peeled after being attached to an adherend, and the adhesive layer provided in the adhesive laminate is compared with the adhesive sheet. As for the adhesive layer, it has a strong adhesive force to be fixed to the adherend.
An adhesive laminate system according to an embodiment of the present invention includes an adhesive laminate of a substrate and an adhesive layer containing an adhesive composition; the adhesive composition contains an adhesive polymer component and a hardening component; and is used in A manufacturing process of a semiconductor device, the manufacturing process includes a step of attaching a plurality of semiconductor elements to the aforementioned adhesive layer of the aforementioned laminated body, a step of curing the aforementioned adhesive layer to form a hardened adhesive layer, and sealing the aforementioned plural A step of forming a sealing body by a semiconductor element, a step of removing the base material from the sealing body without peeling the hardening adhesive layer from the sealing body, a step of forming a rewiring layer electrically connected to the semiconductor element, and an external terminal electrode The step of electrically connecting to the redistribution layer.
A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an aspect of the present invention includes a step of attaching a plurality of semiconductor elements to the aforementioned adhesive layer of a laminated body, a step of curing the aforementioned adhesive layer to form a cured adhesive layer, and sealing. A step of forming a sealing body having a sealing resin layer by the plurality of semiconductor elements, a step of peeling the base material from the sealing body without peeling the hardened adhesive layer from the sealing body, and forming a rewiring electrically connected to the semiconductor element Step of electrically connecting the external terminal electrode to the redistribution layer.
Moreover, in the manufacturing method of the semiconductor device which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, the adhesive laminated body containing an adhesive layer and an adhesive layer may be used. Such an adhesive laminate system includes a substrate, an adhesive layer, and an adhesive layer.
In addition, a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an embodiment of the present invention may also use a semiconductor device having an adhesive layer. In this case, the adhesive layer provided in the semiconductor device has a stronger adhesive force to be fixed to the adherend than the adhesive layer of the adhesive sheet.
In addition, in the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to an embodiment of the present invention, the adhesive layer may include a first adhesive layer and a second adhesive layer.

[First Embodiment]
The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment includes a step of attaching a plurality of semiconductor elements to an adhesive layer of a laminate, a step of curing the adhesive layer to form a cured adhesive layer, and sealing the plurality of semiconductors. A step of forming a sealing body having a sealing resin layer from the device, a step of peeling the substrate from the sealing body without peeling the hardening adhesive layer from the sealing body, a step of forming a rewiring layer electrically connected to the semiconductor element, A step of electrically connecting an external terminal electrode to the redistribution layer; when attaching a plurality of the semiconductor elements to the bonding layer, the back surface of the element opposite to the circuit surface of the semiconductor element having the connection terminal is oriented toward The adhesive layer is attached, and after the semiconductor element is sealed to form the sealing body, a part or the entirety of the sealing resin layer covering the circuit surface is removed to expose the connection terminals, and the rewiring layer is electrically connected to The aforementioned connection terminals have been exposed.
Prior to the step of curing the adhesive layer to form the cured adhesive layer, it is preferable to attach a reinforcing frame to the adhesive layer.

(Base material)
The base material of the bonding laminate of this embodiment is a member that supports an adhesive layer and the like. The substrate of the subsequent laminate is not particularly limited.
The base material is, for example, a resin film. Examples of the resin film system include polyethylene films, polypropylene films, polybutene films, polybutadiene films, polymethylpentene films, polyvinyl chloride films, vinyl chloride copolymer films, and polyterephthalic acid. Ethylene film, Polyethylene naphthalate film, Polybutylene terephthalate film, Polyurethane film, Ethylene vinyl acetate copolymer film, Ion polymer resin film, Ethylene Base) an acrylic copolymer film, an ethylene (meth) acrylate copolymer film, a polystyrene film, a polycarbonate film, a polyimide film, and a fluororesin film . Moreover, you may use these crosslinked films as a base material. Further, the substrate may be a laminated film of this type.
The base material may be, for example, a rigid support. The material of the rigid support may be appropriately determined in consideration of mechanical strength and heat resistance. Examples of the material of the rigid support include metal materials, non-metal inorganic materials, resin materials, and composite materials. Examples of the metal material include SUS. Examples of non-metallic inorganic materials include glass and silicon wafers. Examples of the resin material include epoxy resin, ABS, acrylic, engineering plastic, super engineering plastic, polyimide, polyimide, and the like. Examples of the composite material system include glass epoxy resin. Among these, it is particularly preferable that the material of the rigid support is any material selected from the group consisting of SUS, glass, and silicon wafers. Examples of engineering plastics include nylon, polycarbonate (PC), and polyethylene terephthalate (PET). Examples of the super engineering plastics include polyphenylene sulfide (PPS), polyether fluorene (PES), and polyether ether ketone (PEEK).
The thickness of the substrate is not particularly limited. The thickness of the substrate is preferably 20 μm or more and 50 mm or less, and more preferably 60 μm or more and 20 mm or less. When the thickness of the base material is set to the above range, when the base material is a resin film, the adhesive layer has sufficient flexibility, and thus exhibits good adhesion to the workpiece. The workpiece is, for example, a semiconductor element, and a more specific example is a semiconductor wafer. When the base material is a rigid support, the thickness of the rigid support may be appropriately determined in consideration of mechanical strength, operability, and the like. The thickness of the rigid support is, for example, 100 μm or more and 50 mm or less.

(Adhesive layer)
The adhesive layer of the adhesive laminate of this embodiment preferably contains a hardenable adhesive composition that is hardened by receiving energy from the outside. Examples of the externally supplied energy system include ultraviolet rays, electron beams, and heat. The adhesive layer system preferably contains at least one of an ultraviolet curing adhesive and a thermosetting adhesive. When the base material of the adhesive laminate has heat resistance, the generation of residual stress during thermal curing can be suppressed, so the adhesive layer is preferably a thermosetting adhesive layer containing a thermal curing adhesive.
The adhesive layer system contains, for example, a first adhesive composition. The first adhesive composition system contains an adhesive polymer component (A) and a curable component (B).

(A) Adhesive polymer composition
An adhesive polymer component (A) is used in order to provide sufficient adhesiveness and film-forming properties (sheet-forming properties) to the adhesive layer. As the polymer component (A) of the binder, conventionally known polymers can be used, and specifically, acrylic polymers, polyester resins, urethane resins, acrylic urethane resins, and polysilicon can be used. Oxygen resins and rubber-based polymers.
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the adhesive polymer component (A) is preferably 10,000 or more and 2 million or less, and more preferably 100,000 or more and 1.2 million or less. If the weight average molecular weight of the adhesive polymer component (A) is too low, the adhesive force between the adhesive layer and the adhesive sheet becomes high, which may cause poor transfer of the adhesive layer. If the weight average molecular weight is too high, the adhesiveness of the adhesive layer may occur. If it is lowered, it may become impossible to transfer to a wafer or the like, or the protective film may be peeled from the wafer or the like after the transfer.
In this specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) is a standard polystyrene conversion value measured by the Gel Permeation Chromatography (GPC) method.
As the binder polymer component (A), an acrylic polymer can be preferably used. The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the acrylic polymer is preferably in a range of -60 ° C or higher and 50 ° C or lower, more preferably -50 ° C or higher and 40 ° C or lower, and further preferably in a range of -40 ° C or higher and 30 ° C or lower. If the glass transition temperature of the acrylic polymer is too low, the peeling force between the adhesive layer and the adhesive sheet may increase, resulting in poor transfer of the adhesive layer. If the glass transition temperature is too high, the adhesiveness of the adhesive layer may be lowered, making it impossible. Transfer to a wafer or the like, or peeling of the protective film from the wafer or the like after transfer.
Examples of the single system constituting the acrylic polymer include a (meth) acrylate monomer or the derivative. For example, an alkyl (meth) acrylate having an alkyl group having a carbon number of 1 to 18 may be specifically exemplified by meth (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, and propyl. (Meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, and the like. Specific examples of the (meth) acrylate having a cyclic skeleton include cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, and Cyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentenyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentenyloxyethyl (meth) acrylate, fluorenimine (meth) acrylate, and the like. Examples of the monomer having a functional group include methylol (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate having a hydroxyl group. Examples of the single system constituting the acrylic polymer include a glycidyl (meth) acrylate having an epoxy group. The acrylic polymer is preferably an acrylic polymer containing a monomer having a hydroxyl group, and is compatible with a hardening component (B) described later. The acrylic polymer may be copolymerized by selecting at least one monomer selected from the group consisting of acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile, and styrene.
Furthermore, as the adhesive polymer component (A), a thermoplastic resin may be blended to maintain the flexibility of the cured protective film (curing adhesive layer). As such a thermoplastic resin, a thermoplastic resin having a weight average molecular weight of 1,000 or more and 100,000 or less is preferable, and a thermoplastic resin of 3,000 or more and 80,000 or less is more preferable. The glass transition temperature of the thermoplastic resin is preferably -30 ° C or higher and 120 ° C or lower, and more preferably -20 ° C or higher and 120 ° C or lower. Examples of the thermoplastic resin system include polyester resin, urethane resin, phenoxy resin, polybutene, polybutadiene, and polystyrene. These thermoplastic resins can be used singly or in combination of two or more kinds. The first adhesive composition contains the above-mentioned thermoplastic resin as the adhesive polymer component (A), and the adhesive layer follows the transfer surface of the adhesive layer to suppress generation of voids and the like.

(B) hardening component
As the curable component (B), at least one of a thermosetting component and an energy ray-curable component can be used. As the curable component (B), both a thermosetting component and an energy ray-curable component may be used.
As the thermosetting component system, a thermosetting resin and a thermosetting agent can be used. The thermosetting resin is preferably an epoxy resin, for example.
As the epoxy resin system, conventionally known epoxy resins can be used. Specific examples of the epoxy resin include a polyfunctional epoxy resin, a bisphenol A diglycidyl ether, a hydride of a bisphenol A diglycidyl ether, an o-cresol novolac epoxy resin, and dicyclopentane. Ethylene type epoxy resin, biphenyl type epoxy resin, bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, and phenylene skeleton type epoxy resin, etc., which have more than two functional epoxy compounds in the molecule . The epoxy resins can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The adhesive layer system preferably contains 1 part by mass or more and 1000 parts by mass or less, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more and 500 parts by mass, with respect to 100 parts by mass of the adhesive polymer component (A). It is more preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 200 parts by mass or less. When content of a thermosetting resin is less than 1 mass part, sufficient adhesiveness may not be acquired. When the content of the thermosetting resin is more than 1000 parts by mass, the peeling force between the adhesive layer and the substrate becomes high, and transfer failure of the adhesive layer may occur.
The thermosetting agent functions as a curing agent for a thermosetting resin, particularly for an epoxy resin. As a preferable thermosetting agent, a compound which has 2 or more functional groups which can react with an epoxy group in 1 molecule is mentioned. Examples of the functional group capable of reacting with an epoxy group include a phenolic hydroxyl group, an alcoholic hydroxyl group, an amine group, a carboxyl group, and an acid anhydride group. Among these functional groups, a group of at least one selected from the group consisting of a phenolic hydroxyl group, an amine group, an acid anhydride group, and the like is preferable, and at least one group selected from the group consisting of a phenolic hydroxyl group and an amine group The base is better.
Specific examples of the phenol-based hardener include polyfunctional phenol resins, biphenols, novolac-type phenol resins, dicyclopentadiene-based phenol resins, neo-phenol-based phenol resins, and aralkylphenol resins as amines. Specific examples of the curing agent include DICY (dicyanodiamine). These thermosetting agents can be used singly or in combination of two or more kinds.
The content of the thermosetting agent is more preferably 0.1 parts by mass or more and 500 parts by mass or less based on 100 parts by mass of the thermosetting resin, and more preferably 1 part by mass or more and 200 parts by mass or less. If the content of the thermosetting agent is small, there is a case where the hardening is insufficient and adhesion cannot be obtained. In addition, if the content of the thermosetting agent is excessive, the moisture absorption rate of the adhesive layer is high and the reliability of the semiconductor device is reduced.
The adhesive layer is a curable component (B), and when a thermosetting component is contained, the adhesive layer is thermosetting. In this case, it can be hardened by heating an adhesive layer. In the case where the adhesive laminate of the present embodiment has heat resistance in the base material, it is difficult to cause residual stress in the base material to cause a problem when the adhesive layer is thermally cured.
As the energy-ray-curable component system, a low-molecular compound (energy-ray-polymerizable compound) that can be polymerized and hardened when it is irradiated with energy rays such as ultraviolet rays or electron beams can be used. Specific examples of such an energy ray-curable component include trimethylolpropane triacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol monohydroxypentaacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, or 1,4-butanediol diacrylate, 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate, polyethylene glycol diacrylate, acrylate oligoester, urethane acrylate oligomer, epoxy resin Acrylate compounds such as high-quality acrylates, polyether acrylates, and ikonic acid oligomers.
The energy ray polymerizable compound has at least one polymerizable double bond in the molecule.
The weight-average molecular weight of the energy ray polymerizable compound is usually 100 or more and 30,000 or less, preferably 300 or more and 10,000 or less.
The blending amount of the energy ray polymerizable compound is preferably 1 part by mass or more and 1500 parts by mass or less, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more and 500 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the adhesive polymer component (A) It is more preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 200 parts by mass or less.
As the energy ray-curable component, an energy ray-curable polymer can also be used, which is formed by bonding an energy ray polymerizable group to the main chain or side chain of the binder polymer component (A). Such an energy ray-curable polymer has both a function as a binder polymer component (A) and a function as a curable component (B).
The main skeleton of the energy ray-curable polymer is not particularly limited. The main skeleton of the energy ray-curable polymer is preferably an acrylic polymer which is widely used as a binder polymer component (A). The main skeleton of the energy ray-curable polymer is preferably polyester or polyether. Since it is easy to control the synthesis and physical properties, it is more preferable to use an acrylic polymer as the main skeleton of the energy ray-curable polymer.
An energy ray polymerizable group bonded to the main chain or side chain of the energy ray-curable polymer, such as a group containing an energy ray polymerizable carbon-carbon double bond. Specific examples of the energy ray polymerizable group include a (meth) acrylfluorenyl group and the like. The energy ray polymerizable system may be bonded to the energy ray-curable polymer through an alkylene group, an alkyleneoxy group, or a polyalkyleneoxy group.
The weight-average molecular weight (Mw) of the energy-ray-curable polymer to which the energy-ray polymerizable group has been bonded is preferably 10,000 or more and 2 million or less, and more preferably 100,000 or more and 1.5 million or less.
The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the energy ray-curable polymer is preferably -60 ° C or higher and 50 ° C or lower, more preferably -50 ° C or higher and 40 ° C or lower, and more preferably -40 ° C or higher and 30 ° C or lower.
The energy ray-curable polymer is obtained by, for example, reacting an acrylic polymer containing a functional group with a polymerizable group-containing compound. Examples of the functional group system of the acrylic polymer containing this functional group include a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, an amine group, a substituted amine group, and an epoxy group. The polymerizable group-containing compound is a substituent capable of reacting with the functional group of the acrylic polymer and an energy ray polymerizable carbon-carbon double bond, and has one or more and five or less per molecule. Examples of the substituent system that reacts with the functional group of the acrylic polymer include an isocyanate group, a glycidyl group, and a carboxyl group.
Examples of the polymerizable group-containing compound system include (meth) acryloxyethyl isocyanate, m-isopropenyl-α, α-dimethylbenzyl isocyanate, (meth) acrylfluorenyl isocyanate, and allyl Isocyanate, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid, and the like.
An acrylic polymer is a (meth) acrylic monomer or a derivative thereof having at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, an amine group, a substituted amine group, an epoxy group, and the like, and is copolymerizable therewith. Other (meth) acrylic acid ester monomers or copolymers composed of the derivatives are preferred.
Examples of the (meth) acrylic acid monomer having a functional group such as a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, an amine group, a substituted amino group, an epoxy group, or the like are 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylic acid having a hydroxyl group. Esters and 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylates, acrylic acid having carboxyl groups, methacrylic acid and itaconic acid, and glycidyl methacrylate and glycidyl acrylate having epoxy groups.
Examples of other (meth) acrylic acid ester monomers or derivatives thereof that are copolymerizable with the (meth) acrylic acid monomer include, for example, alkyl (meth) groups having 1 to 18 carbon atoms Specific examples of acrylate include meth (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethyl Hexyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
Examples of other (meth) acrylic acid ester monomers or derivatives thereof copolymerizable with the (meth) acrylic acid monomer include (meth) acrylic acid esters having a cyclic skeleton, and specific examples thereof Cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl acrylate, dicyclopentyl acrylate, dicyclopentenyl acrylate, dicyclopentenyl ethyl acrylate, and醯 imine acrylate and so on. The acrylic polymer may be copolymerized by selecting at least any one of a group consisting of vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile, and styrene, for example.
Even in the case of using an energy ray-curable polymer, the aforementioned energy ray polymerizable compound may be used in combination, and the binder polymer component (A) may be used in combination. The relationship between the blending amounts of these three (adhesive polymer component (A), energy ray polymerizable compound, and energy ray hardening polymer) in the adhesive layer of this embodiment is relative to the energy ray hardening type. For the total mass of the polymer and the binder polymer component (A) of 100 parts by mass, the energy ray polymerizable compound preferably contains 1 part by mass or more and 1500 parts by mass or less, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more, 500 parts by mass or less, more preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 200 parts by mass or less.
By imparting energy ray hardenability to the adhesive layer, the adhesive layer can be easily and quickly cured in a short time, and the production efficiency of the wafer with the cured adhesive layer is improved. The hardening adhesive layer system can also function as a protective film for protecting a semiconductor element. Previously, protective films for semiconductor devices such as wafers were generally formed of thermosetting resins such as epoxy resins. However, the curing temperature of thermosetting resins exceeded 200 ° C, and the curing time required about 2 hours. Will become an obstacle to improve production efficiency. However, the energy-ray-curable adhesive layer is cured in a short time by irradiation with energy rays, so that a protective film can be easily formed, which can contribute to the improvement of production efficiency.

‧Other ingredients
The adhesive layer system may contain the following components as other components in addition to the adhesive polymer component (A) and the curable component (B). The adhesive layer system may include, as other components, a coloring agent (C), a hardening accelerator (D), a coupling agent (E), an inorganic filler (F), a photopolymerization initiator (G), and a crosslinking agent ( H) and at least one selected from the group consisting of the universal additive (I).

(C) Colorant
It is preferable that the adhesive layer system contains a colorant (C). The coloring agent is mixed in the adhesive layer, and when the semiconductor device is installed in the machine, the infrared rays generated from the surrounding devices are shielded, which can prevent the failure of the semiconductor device caused by the infrared rays. In addition, the hardened adhesive layer (protective film) obtained by hardening the adhesive layer improves the visibility of characters at the time of printing such as a product number. That is, the semiconductor device or semiconductor wafer on which the protective film has been formed is attached to the surface of the protective film, and the type and the like are usually printed by a laser marking method (for example, a method of printing the surface of the protective film by laser light) Printing. When the protective film contains the colorant (C), the contrast between the portion of the protective film that has been scraped by the laser light and the portion that is not so can be fully obtained, and the visibility is improved. As the colorant (C), at least any one of an organic pigment, an inorganic pigment, an organic dye, and an inorganic dye can be used. The colorant (C) is preferably a black pigment from the viewpoint of electromagnetic wave and infrared shielding properties. It is not specifically limited as a black pigment system. Examples of the black pigment system include carbon black, iron oxide, manganese dioxide, aniline black, and activated carbon. From the viewpoint of improving the reliability of semiconductor devices, carbon black is particularly preferable as a black pigment. The colorant (C) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In the present embodiment, a coloring agent that reduces the transmittance of at least one of visible light and infrared rays and ultraviolet rays is used. When the transmittance of ultraviolet rays has been reduced, the high curing property of the adhesive layer is particularly excellent. In addition to the black pigment described above, the coloring agent that reduces the transmittance of at least any one of visible light and infrared rays and ultraviolet rays is absorbing or reflecting in a wavelength region of at least any one of visible light and infrared rays and ultraviolet rays The coloring agent is not particularly limited.
The blending amount of the colorant (C) is more preferably 0.1 parts by mass or more and 35 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more and 25 parts by mass or less based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content constituting the adhesive layer. 1 mass part or more and 15 mass parts or less is more preferable.

(D) Hardening accelerator
The hardening accelerator (D) is used to adjust the hardening speed of the adhesive layer. The hardening accelerator (D) is particularly preferably used when the epoxy resin and the thermosetting agent are used together in the hardening component (B).
The hardening accelerator (D) is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of tertiary amines, imidazoles, organic phosphines, and tetraphenylboron salts.
Examples of the tertiary amines include triethylenediamine, benzyldimethylamine, triethanolamine, dimethylaminoethanol, and ginsyl (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol.
Examples of the imidazoles include 2-methylimidazole, 2-phenylimidazole, 2-phenyl-4-methylimidazole, 2-phenyl-4,5-dimethylol imidazole, and 2-phenyl 4-methyl-5-hydroxymethylimidazole and the like.
Examples of the organic phosphine-based system include tributylphosphine, diphenylphosphine, and triphenylphosphine.
Examples of the tetraphenylboronate system include tetraphenylphosphonium tetraphenylborate and triphenylphosphinetetraphenylborate.
The hardening accelerator (D) can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The hardening accelerator (D) is preferably contained in an amount of 0.01 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the hardenable component (B), and in an amount of 0.1 parts by mass or more and 1 part by mass or less Contains better. By containing the hardening accelerator (D) in an amount within the above range, the adhesive layer has excellent adhesive properties even when exposed to high temperature and high humidity conditions. In addition, by including the hardening accelerator (D) in an amount within the above range, the adhesive layer system can achieve high reliability even when exposed to severe reflow conditions. If the content of the hardening accelerator (D) is small, there is a concern that the hardening is insufficient and sufficient adhesion characteristics cannot be obtained. If the content of the hardening accelerator having a high polarity is excessive, the hardening is promoted under conditions of high temperature and high humidity. The agent moves to the bonding interface side of the adhesive layer to segregate, and there is a concern that the reliability of the semiconductor device is reduced.

(E) Coupling agent
The coupling agent (E) can also be used in order to improve at least any one of the adhesiveness of the adhesive layer to the semiconductor element, the adhesiveness, and the cohesiveness of the cured adhesive layer (protective film). In addition, by using the coupling agent (E), the water resistance can be improved without impairing the heat resistance of the hardened adhesive layer (protective film) obtained by curing the adhesive layer.
The coupling agent (E) is preferably a compound having a group that reacts with a functional group such as a binder polymer component (A) or a curable component (B). The coupling agent (E) is preferably a silane coupling agent. Examples of such a coupling agent system include γ-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, and β- (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) Ethyltrimethoxysilane, γ- (methacryloxypropyl) trimethoxysilane, γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, N-6- (aminoethyl) -γ-amino group Propyltrimethoxysilane, N-6- (aminoethyl) -γ-aminopropylmethyldiethoxysilane, N-phenyl-γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, γ- Ureapropyltriethoxysilane, γ-mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-mercaptopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, bis (3-triethoxysilylpropyl) tetrasulfane, Methyltrimethoxysilane, methyltriethoxysilane, vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane and imidazolane. The coupling agent (E) can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The coupling agent (E) is usually 0.1 parts by mass or more and 20 parts by mass or less, and preferably 0.2 parts by mass or more, based on 100 parts by mass of the total of the adhesive polymer component (A) and the hardening component (B). 10 parts by mass or less, more preferably 0.3 parts by mass or more and 5 parts by mass or less. If the content of the coupling agent (E) is less than 0.1 parts by mass, there is a possibility that the above-mentioned effects cannot be obtained. When the content of the coupling agent (E) is more than 20 parts by mass, there is a possibility that the gas may be emitted.

(F) inorganic filler
By blending the inorganic filler (F) in the adhesive layer, the thermal expansion coefficient of the cured adhesive layer (protective film) after curing can be adjusted. By optimizing the thermal expansion coefficient of the hardened adhesive layer (protective film) after curing the semiconductor wafer, the reliability of the semiconductor device can be improved. Moreover, the moisture absorption rate of the hardening adhesive layer (protective film) after hardening can also be reduced.
Preferred inorganic fillers include powders of silicon dioxide, aluminum oxide, talc, calcium carbonate, titanium oxide, iron oxide, silicon carbide, and boron nitride, beads of such powders, Single crystal fiber and glass fiber. Among these inorganic fillers, silica dioxide filler and alumina filler are preferred. The said inorganic filler (F) can be used individually or in mixture of 2 or more types. The content of the inorganic filler (F) is usually adjusted within a range of 1 part by mass or more and 80 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content constituting the adhesive layer.

(G) Photopolymerization initiator
When the adhesive layer contains an energy ray-curable component as the curable component (B), the energy ray-curable component is hardened by irradiating energy rays such as ultraviolet rays during the use. In this case, by including the photopolymerization initiator (G) in the composition constituting the adhesive layer, the polymerization hardening time can be shortened, and the amount of light irradiation can be reduced.
Specific examples of such a photopolymerization initiator (G) include benzophenone, acetophenone, benzoin, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ethyl ether, benzoin isopropyl ether, Benzoin isobutyl ether, benzoin benzoic acid, methyl benzoate, benzoic acid dimethyl ketal, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone, α-hydroxycyclohexylphenyl ketone, benzyl Diphenylsulfide, tetramethylthiuram monosulfide, azobisisobutyronitrile, benzyl, dibenzyl, diethylfluorenyl, 1,2-diphenylmethane, 2-hydroxy-2- Methyl-1- [4- (1-methylvinyl) phenyl] acetone, 2,4,6-trimethylbenzylidene diphenylphosphine oxide, β-chloroanthraquinone, and the like. The photopolymerization initiator (G) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The proportion of the photopolymerization initiator (G) is preferably 0.1 mass parts or more and 10 mass parts or less relative to 100 mass parts of the energy ray-curable component, and 1 mass part or more and 5 mass parts or less Better. If the blending ratio of the photopolymerization initiator (G) is less than 0.1 parts by mass, there is a concern that the transferability cannot be satisfied due to insufficient photopolymerization. If the blending ratio of the photopolymerization initiator (G) is more than 10 parts by mass, a residue that does not contribute to photopolymerization is generated, and there is a concern that the hardenability of the adhesive layer becomes insufficient.

(H) Crosslinking agent
In order to adjust the initial adhesive force and cohesive force of the adhesive layer, a crosslinking agent (H) may be added to the adhesive layer. Examples of the crosslinking agent (H) include organic polyisocyanate compounds and organic polyimide compounds.
Examples of the organic polyisocyanate compounds include aromatic polyisocyanate compounds, aliphatic polyisocyanate compounds, alicyclic polyisocyanate compounds, and terpolymers of these organic polyisocyanate compounds, and the combination of these organic polyisocyanate compounds and A terminal isocyanate urethane prepolymer and the like obtained by reacting a polyol compound.
Examples of the organic polyisocyanate compound include 2,4-toluene diisocyanate, 2,6-toluene diisocyanate, 1,3-xylene diisocyanate, 1,4-xylene diisocyanate, and diphenylmethane-4, 4'-diisocyanate, diphenylmethane-2,4'-diisocyanate, 3-methyldiphenylmethane diisocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate, isophorone diisocyanate, dicyclohexylmethane-4,4 '-Diisocyanate, dicyclohexylmethane-2,4'-diisocyanate, trimethylolpropane adduct toluene diisocyanate and lysine isocyanate.
Examples of the organic polyimide compound include N, N'-diphenylmethane-4,4'-bis (1-aziridinecarboxyamidoamine), trimethylolpropane-tri-β-aziridine Pyridylpropionate, tetramethylolmethane-tri-β-aziridinylpropionate, and N, N'-toluene-2,4-bis (1-aziridinecarboxyamidoamine) triethylenemelamine Wait.
The crosslinking agent (H) is generally 0.01 mass part or more and 20 mass parts or less, and preferably 0.1 mass based on 100 mass parts of the total amount of the adhesive polymer component (A) and the energy ray-curable polymer. It is used in a proportion of not less than 10 parts by mass and more preferably not less than 0.5 part by mass and not more than 5 parts by mass.

(I) Universal additives
In addition to the above, in the adhesive layer system, a general-purpose additive (I) may be blended as necessary. Examples of general-purpose additives include leveling agents, plasticizers, antistatic agents, antioxidants, ion trapping agents, getters, and chain transfer agents.
The adhesive layer composed of the components described above has adhesiveness and hardenability, and is easily adhered by pressing a workpiece (semiconductor wafer or wafer) in an uncured state. Then, after hardening, a hardening adhesive layer (protective film) with high impact resistance can be given at the end, and the bonding strength is also excellent, and sufficient protection function can be maintained under severe high temperature and high humidity conditions. The adhesive layer system may have a single-layer structure, and may include a multi-layer structure as long as the layer containing the above-mentioned components includes one or more layers.
The thickness of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited. The thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably 3 μm or more and 300 μm or less, more preferably 5 μm or more and 250 μm or less, and more preferably 7 μm or more and 200 μm or less.
A scale that indicates the transmittance of at least one of visible light and infrared light in the adhesive layer and ultraviolet light. The maximum transmittance at a wavelength of 300 nm to 1200 nm is preferably 20% or less, more preferably 0% or more and 15% or less. It is more preferable that it is more than 0%, 10% or less, and more preferably 0.001% or more and 8% or less. When the maximum transmittance of the adhesive layer with a wavelength of 300 nm or more and 1200 nm or less is set to the above range, when the adhesive layer contains an energy-ray-curable component (particularly, an ultraviolet-curable component), the adhesive layer is colored. In this case, the hardenability is also excellent. In addition, the reduction in the transmittance of at least one of the visible light wavelength region and the infrared wavelength region can result in the effect of preventing the failure of the semiconductor device due to infrared rays or improving the visibility of printing. The maximum transmittance of the adhesive layer at a wavelength of 300 nm or more and 1200 nm or less can be adjusted by the colorant (C). The maximum transmittance of the adhesive layer is measured using a UV-vis spectrum inspection device (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), and the total light transmittance of the adhesive layer (thickness: 25 μm) from 300 nm to 1200 nm is measured. The highest value (maximum transmittance).

(Manufacturing method of semiconductor device)
FIGS. 1 (FIGS. 1A to 1E) and 2 (FIGS. 2A to 2D) are diagrams showing an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment.
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, an adhesive laminate 1 including a substrate 11 and an adhesive layer 12 is used. In the adhesive laminate 1 of this embodiment, the adhesive layer 12 is directly laminated on the base material 11.
It is preferable that the adhesive layer 12 contains a hardening type adhesive which is hardened by receiving external energy. Examples of the externally supplied energy system include ultraviolet rays, electron beams, and heat. It is preferable that the adhesive layer 12 contains at least any one of an ultraviolet curing adhesive and a thermosetting adhesive. In this embodiment, the adhesive system contained in the adhesive layer 12 is, for example, the first adhesive composition described above.

‧Semiconductor wafer attaching steps
1A and 1B are schematic cross-sectional views illustrating a step of attaching the semiconductor wafer CP to the adhesive layer 12 of the laminated body 1 (the case may be referred to as a semiconductor wafer attaching step). Although FIG. 1A shows one semiconductor wafer CP, in this embodiment, a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP are attached to the adhesive layer 12 as shown in FIG. 1B. When the semiconductor wafers CP are attached, they can be attached individually, or a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP can be attached at the same time.
The semiconductor wafer CP used in this embodiment has a circuit surface W1 on which a connection terminal W3 is provided, and a wafer back surface W2 which is a back surface of an element on the opposite side to the circuit surface W1. In this embodiment, the wafer back surface W2 is attached to the adhesive layer 12.

‧Reinforcement frame attaching steps
In this embodiment, it is preferable to further include a step of attaching the reinforcing frame 2 to the laminated body 1 (the step may be referred to as a reinforcing frame attaching step) (refer to FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B). By attaching the reinforcing frame 2 to the adhesive layered body 1, the operability of the adhesive layered body 1 to which the semiconductor wafer CP is attached in the manufacturing process of the semiconductor device manufacturing method is improved.
The shape of the reinforcing frame 2 is not particularly limited. For example, a frame-shaped reinforcing frame is provided, which surrounds the entire periphery of the area to which the plurality of semiconductor wafers CP to which the laminated body 1 has been attached are attached. Another example is a reinforcing frame formed in a lattice shape surrounding each or a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP. Another example is a cross-shaped reinforcing frame that divides a region to which a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP attached to the laminated body 1 is attached into a plurality of regions.
The step of attaching the reinforcing frame 2 may be performed before the step of attaching the semiconductor wafer CP to the bonding layer 1, or may be performed after the step of attaching the semiconductor wafer CP to the bonding layer 1.

‧Adhesive layer hardening step
FIG. 1C is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of hardening the adhesive layer 12 to form a hardened adhesive layer 12A (the case may be referred to as an adhesive layer hardening step). By hardening the adhesive layer 12, the semiconductor wafer CP is strongly bonded by hardening the adhesive layer 12A, and the movement of the semiconductor wafer CP in the subsequent resin sealing step can be suppressed.
Examples of the degree of hardening of the adhesive layer include complete hardening or semi-hardening (B stage).
The method of hardening the adhesive layer 12 is preferably selected appropriately in accordance with the type of the adhesive contained in the adhesive layer 12. If the adhesive contained in the adhesive layer 12 is an ultraviolet curable adhesive, ultraviolet rays are irradiated to the adhesive layer 12 to harden the adhesive layer 12. Since the irradiated ultraviolet rays reach the adhesive layer 12 and the adhesive layer 12 is hardened, it is preferable that the substrate 11 of the adhesive laminate 1 has ultraviolet transmittance.
In this embodiment, since the reinforcing frame 2 is attached to the adhesive layer 12, it is possible to suppress the deflection and curling of the adhesive laminate 1 due to shrinkage when the adhesive layer 12 is hardened. Therefore, before the step of hardening the adhesive layer 12 to form a hardened adhesive layer 12A, it is preferable to attach the reinforcing frame 2 to the adhesive layer 12.

‧Sealing step
FIG. 1D is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of sealing a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP after the formation of the hardened adhesive layer 12A (the sealing step may be called).
In this embodiment, the circuit surface W1 side of the semiconductor wafer CP is covered with the sealing member 30 to form the sealing body 3. A sealing member 30 is also filled between the plurality of semiconductor wafers CP. In the present embodiment, since the reinforcing frame 2 is also placed inside the sealing body 3, the rigidity of the sealing body 3 is improved, and the bending of the semiconductor package generated after the resin sealing can be suppressed.
The method of sealing the plurality of semiconductor wafers CP using the sealing member 30 is not particularly limited.
For example, a method of placing a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP supported by the laminated body 1 in a mold, injecting a fluid sealing resin material into the mold, and heating and hardening the sealing resin material to form a sealing resin layer may be adopted. . Alternatively, a method of placing a sheet-shaped sealing resin on the circuit surface W1 of the plurality of semiconductor wafers CP, and heating and curing the sealing resin to form a sealing resin layer may be adopted. Alternatively, a method of placing a sheet-shaped sealing resin so as to cover the semiconductor wafer CP and the reinforcing frame 2 and heating and curing the sealing resin to form a sealing resin layer may be adopted. When a sheet-shaped sealing resin is used, it is preferable to seal the semiconductor wafer CP and the reinforcing frame 2 by a vacuum lamination method. By this vacuum lamination method, a gap can be prevented from being generated between the semiconductor wafer CP and the reinforcing frame 2. The temperature condition range of heat hardening by a vacuum lamination method is 80 degreeC or more and 120 degreeC or less, for example.
Examples of the material of the sealing member 30 include epoxy resin. The epoxy resin used as the sealing member 30 may include, for example, a phenol resin, an elastomer, an inorganic filler, a hardening accelerator, and the like.
Between the sealing step and the subsequent step, a step of hardening the sealing member 30 (in some cases, an additional hardening step) may be performed. This step is exemplified by a method of heating the sealing resin layer to promote curing. Alternatively, instead of performing an additional curing step, the sealing member 30 may be sufficiently cured by heating in the sealing step.

‧Substrate peeling step
FIG. 1E is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of peeling the substrate 11 adhering to the laminated body 1 after sealing a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP (the case may be referred to as a substrate peeling step).
In this embodiment, the hardened adhesive layer 12A is left on the sealing body 3, and the base material 11 is peeled from the sealing body 3.

‧Procedure for connecting terminal exposure
FIG. 2A is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of exposing the connection terminal W3 of the semiconductor wafer CP on the surface of the sealing body 3 (the connection terminal exposure step may be referred to).
In this embodiment, a part or the whole of the sealing resin layer of the sealing body 3 covering the circuit surface W1 of the semiconductor wafer CP and the connection terminal W3 is removed to expose the connection terminal W3. The method of exposing the connection terminal W3 of the semiconductor wafer CP is not particularly limited. Examples of the method for exposing the connection terminal W3 of the semiconductor wafer CP include a method of grinding the sealing resin layer to expose the connection terminal W3, and removing the sealing resin layer by a method such as laser irradiation to expose the connection terminal W3. And a method of removing the sealing resin layer by an etching method to expose the connection terminal W3. If it can be electrically connected to the redistribution layer described later, the entire connection terminal W3 can be exposed, and a part of the connection terminal W3 can also be exposed.

‧Re-wiring layer formation steps
FIG. 2B is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of forming a redistribution layer 4 electrically connected to the semiconductor wafer CP (there may be a step called a redistribution layer formation step).
In this embodiment, the redistribution layer 4 and the connection terminal W3 exposed on the surface of the sealing body 3 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, the redistribution layer 4 is formed on the circuit surface W1 and on the surface 3S of the sealing body 3. The method for forming the redistribution layer 4 may be a method generally known in the past.
The redistribution layer 4 includes an external electrode pad 41 for connecting external terminal electrodes. In this embodiment, the external electrode pads 41 are formed in a plurality of places. In this embodiment, an external electrode pad 41 is also formed that is fan-out outside the area of the semiconductor wafer CP.

‧External terminal electrode connection steps
FIG. 2C is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of electrically connecting the external terminal electrode 5 to the redistribution layer 4 (sometimes referred to as an external terminal electrode connection step).
In this embodiment, the external terminal electrode 5 is placed on the external electrode pad 41, and a solder ball or the like is placed thereon, and the external terminal electrode 5 and the external electrode pad 41 are electrically connected by soldering or the like. The material of the solder ball is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include lead-containing solder and lead-free solder.

‧Single chip step
FIG. 2D is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of singulating the sealing body 3 to which the external terminal electrode 5 is connected (the step may be referred to as a singulating step).
The method of singulating the sealing body 3 is not particularly limited. Examples of the singulation method include a singulation method using a cutting means such as a dicing saw, and a laser irradiation method. The step of singulating the sealing body 3 may be performed by attaching the sealing body 3 to an adhesive sheet such as a dicing sheet.
In the present embodiment, a semiconductor package 100 including a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP is manufactured by singulating the sealing body 3 into a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP. In the semiconductor package 100, a state in which the hardening adhesive layer 12A is adhered to the wafer back surface W2 of the semiconductor wafer CP is maintained. That is, the adhesive layer 12 of the adhesive laminate 1 is not used for temporary fixing to be peeled off after the resin is sealed, but is included as a part of the semiconductor package 100 as a hardened adhesive layer 12A firmly adhered to the semiconductor wafer CP.
In this embodiment, since the external terminal electrode 5 is connected to the external electrode pad 41 outside the area from the fan-out to the semiconductor wafer CP, the semiconductor package 100 can be used as a fan-out type wafer-level package ( FO-WLP).

‧installation steps
It is also preferable that the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment includes a step of mounting the semiconductor package 100 on a printed circuit board or the like (the mounting step may be called).

‧ Effect of implementation form
According to the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, it is possible to suppress a defect that the semiconductor wafer CP is shifted from a predetermined position due to the pressure during resin sealing.
Compared with the method of temporarily fixing using an adhesive tape as in Document 1, in the manufacturing method of this embodiment, an adhesive laminate is used, and the adhesive layer 12 is hardened, and then the semiconductor wafer CP is resin-sealed. Therefore, with the adhesive laminate of this embodiment, the semiconductor wafer CP can be held more firmly in the hardened adhesive layer 12A than the adhesive tape of the previous method, and the deviation from the specified position can be suppressed. Migration (grain displacement).
In addition, compared with the method using an adhesive tape as in Document 1, the manufacturing method in this embodiment is because the adhesive layer 12 is hardened to form a hardened adhesive layer 12A, so even if it is not the method as in Document 1 The semiconductor wafer CP is fixed to the substrate, and the operability of the semiconductor wafer CP can be prevented from being lowered by hardening the rigidity of the adhesive layer 12A. Therefore, reducing the number of components and steps used in the method of manufacturing a semiconductor device can simplify the manufacturing steps.
In addition, since the hardened adhesive layer 12A has rigidity, the rigidity of the sealing body 3 is improved, and it is possible to suppress the semiconductor package from being bent after the resin is sealed.
The hardening adhesive layer 12A is included as a part of the semiconductor package 100. Therefore, when the hardening adhesive layer 12A is formed of a laser-printable material, identification information such as a manufacturing number can be printed on the semiconductor package 100. The hardened adhesive layer 12A.

[Second Embodiment]
The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment includes a step of attaching a plurality of semiconductor elements to an adhesive layer of a laminate, a step of curing the adhesive layer to form a cured adhesive layer, and sealing the plurality of semiconductors. A step of forming a sealing body having a sealing resin layer from the device, a step of peeling the substrate from the sealing body without peeling the hardening adhesive layer from the sealing body, a step of forming a rewiring layer electrically connected to the semiconductor element, A step of electrically connecting the external terminal electrode to the redistribution layer; when attaching a plurality of the semiconductor elements to the adhesive layer, the circuit surface having the connection terminals with the semiconductor element is attached to the adhesive layer In addition, after peeling the base material from the sealing body, a part or the whole of the hardening adhesive layer covering the circuit surface is removed to expose the connection terminals, and the rewiring layer is electrically connected to the exposed connection terminals.
Prior to the step of curing the adhesive layer to form the cured adhesive layer, it is preferable to attach a reinforcing frame to the adhesive layer.

(Base material)
The base material of the adhesive laminate of this embodiment is not particularly limited, and for example, the same base material as the base material described in the first embodiment can be used.

(Adhesive layer)
It is preferable that the adhesive layer of the adhesive laminate of this embodiment also contains a hardening type adhesive which hardens by receiving energy from the outside. The adhesive layer system preferably contains at least one of an ultraviolet curing adhesive and a thermosetting adhesive. When the base material of the adhesive laminate has heat resistance, the generation of residual stress during thermal curing can be suppressed, so the adhesive layer is preferably a thermosetting adhesive layer containing a thermal curing adhesive.
The adhesive layer of this embodiment contains, for example, a second adhesive composition.
The adhesive layer is capable of imparting sheet shape maintenance and hardening properties by adding an adhesive component having a reactive double bond group. In addition, since the adhesive component system includes an epoxy group described below in addition to the reactive double bond group, the epoxy groups or the reactive double bond group are subjected to addition polymerization to form a three-dimensional mesh structure. The hardening of the adhesive layer is achieved. As a result, the adhesive layer system can improve the reliability of the semiconductor device compared to an adhesive layer composed of an adhesive component having no reactive double bond group. Furthermore, in the case where the adhesive layer is added to a filler (L) having a reactive double bond group described later on its surface, the adhesive component having a reactive double bond group is compared with an adhesive having no reactive double bond group. The component has high compatibility with the filler (L).
Examples of the adhesive component system having a reactive double bond group include a polymer component (J) and a thermosetting component (K). The reactive double bond system may include at least one of a polymer component (J) and a thermosetting component (K). The polymer component may be referred to as a binder polymer component.
The second adhesive composition preferably contains a polymer component (J) and a thermosetting component (K).
At the time when the adhesive layer is hardened, the initial adhesiveness for temporarily adhering to the function of the workpiece may be pressure-sensitive adhesiveness, or it may be a property that is softened and adhered by heat. The initial adhesiveness is usually controlled by the characteristics of the adhesive component and the adjustment of the amount of the filler (L) to be described later.

(J) Polymer composition
The polymer component (J) is added for the main purpose of imparting sheet shape retention to the adhesive layer.
In order to achieve the above object, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer component (J) is usually 20,000 or more, and preferably 20,000 or more and 3,000,000 or less.
As the polymer component (J), acrylic polymers, polyesters, phenoxy resins, polycarbonates, polyethers, polyurethanes, polysiloxanes, and rubber-based polymers can be used. Select at least one from the group. In addition, two or more polymer components in combination may be used as the polymer component in such two or more combinations. For example, an acrylic polyol having an acrylic polymer having a hydroxyl group may be used at the molecular terminal. Acrylic urethane resin and the like obtained by reacting a urethane prepolymer having an isocyanate group. Furthermore, the polymer component (J) is a polymer containing two or more types of bonded polymers, and two or more of these may be used in combination.

(J1) acrylic polymer
As the polymer component (J), an acrylic polymer (J1) is preferably used. The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the acrylic polymer (J1) is preferably -60 ° C or higher and 50 ° C or lower, more preferably -50 ° C or higher and 40 ° C or lower, further preferably -40 ° C or higher and 30 ° C or lower. Range. If the glass transition temperature of the acrylic polymer (J1) is high, the adhesiveness of the adhesive layer is lowered, and there is a concern that it cannot be transferred to a workpiece.
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the acrylic polymer (J1) is preferably 100,000 or more and 1,500,000 or less. When the weight average molecular weight of the acrylic polymer (J1) is high, the adhesiveness of the adhesive layer is lowered, and there is a concern that it cannot be transferred to a workpiece.
The acrylic polymer (J1) is, as a monomer constituting the acrylic polymer (J1), at least a (meth) acrylate monomer or the derivative thereof. Examples of the (meth) acrylate monomer or the derivative include the acrylic polymer exemplified by the acrylic polymer (A1) described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-027655. As the monomer constituting the acrylic polymer (J1), a monomer having a carboxyl group can also be used. As the thermosetting component (K) described later, when an epoxy-based thermosetting component is used, it is because a carboxyl group reacts with an epoxy group in the epoxy-based thermosetting component. It is better to use less.
When the acrylic polymer (J1) has a reactive double bond group, the reactive double bond group is added to a unit of a continuous structure that becomes the skeleton of the acrylic polymer (J1), or is added to a terminal.
The acrylic polymer (J1) having a reactive double bond group is, for example, an acrylic polymer having a reactive functional group that reacts with the reactive functional group having one or more and five or less per molecule. It is obtained by reacting a substituent containing a polymerizable group with a substituent of a reactive double bond group.
As a reactive double bond system which an acrylic polymer (J1) has, a vinyl group, an allyl group, a (meth) acrylfluorenyl group, etc. are mentioned preferably.
The reactive functional group of the acrylic polymer (J1) is synonymous with the reactive functional group of the component (A) described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-027655. The acrylic polymer having a reactive functional group can be obtained by the method described in the component (A) of the publication. The polymerizable group-containing compound is the same as the energy ray-curable polymer exemplified by the component (AD) described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-027655.
When an adhesive layer contains the crosslinking agent (N) mentioned later, it is preferable that an acrylic polymer (J1) has a reactive functional group.
Among them, the acrylic polymer (J1) having a hydroxyl group as a reactive functional group is preferable because the production is easy, and it is easy to introduce a crosslinking structure using a crosslinking agent (N). The acrylic polymer (J1) having a hydroxyl group is excellent in compatibility with a thermosetting component (K) described later.
When a reactive functional group is introduced into the acrylic polymer (J1) as a monomer constituting the acrylic polymer (J1), a monomer having a reactive functional group is used as a monomer. The proportion of the total mass of the monomer of the acrylic polymer (J1) is preferably 1% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less, and more preferably 3% by mass or more and 15% by mass or less. The constitutional unit derived from the monomer having a reactive functional group in the acrylic polymer (J1) is set to the above range, and the reactive functional group and the crosslinkable functional group of the crosslinker (N) are reacted to form Three-dimensional mesh structure can increase the crosslinking density of acrylic polymer (J1). As a result, the adhesive layer system has excellent shear strength. In addition, since the water absorption of the adhesive layer is reduced, a semiconductor device having excellent package reliability can be obtained.

(J2) Non-acrylic resin
As the polymer component (J), a non-acrylic resin (J2) can be used. The non-acrylic resin (J2) is a resin selected from the group consisting of polyester, phenoxy resin, polycarbonate, polyether, polyurethane, polysiloxane, and rubber-based polymer, or From these groups, two or more kinds of resins are selected as the resins to be bonded. The non-acrylic resin (J2) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. The weight average molecular weight of the non-acrylic resin (J2) is preferably 20,000 or more and 100,000 or less, and more preferably 20,000 or more and 80,000 or less.
The glass transition temperature of the non-acrylic resin (J2) is preferably in the range of -30 ° C or higher and 150 ° C or lower, and more preferably in the range of -20 ° C or higher and 120 ° C or lower.
When the non-acrylic resin (J2) and the above-mentioned acrylic polymer (J1) are used in combination, when the adhesive layer is transferred to the workpiece, the adhesive layer can follow the transfer surface to suppress the generation of voids and the like.
When the non-acrylic resin (J2) is used in combination with the above-mentioned acrylic polymer (J1), the content of the non-acrylic resin (J2) is the mass of the non-acrylic resin (J2) and the acrylic polymer (J1) The ratio (J2: J1) is usually in the range of 1:99 to 60:40, preferably in the range of 1:99 to 30:70. When the content of the non-acrylic resin (J2) is within this range, the aforementioned effects can be obtained.
As the polymer component (J), when an acrylic polymer (J1) or a phenoxy resin having an epoxy group in a side chain is used, the epoxy group contained in the polymer component (J) is a component that participates in thermal curing. However, in this embodiment, such a polymer or resin is not a thermosetting component (K), but is operated as a polymer component (J).

(K) Thermosetting component
The thermosetting component (K) is added with the main purpose of imparting thermosetting property to the adhesive layer.
The thermosetting component (K) contains a compound having an epoxy group (hereinafter, it may be described as "epoxy compound" only). The thermosetting component (K) is preferably used in combination with an epoxy compound and a thermosetting agent.
Since the thermosetting component (K) is used in combination with the polymer component (J), the viscosity of the coating composition for forming an adhesive layer is suppressed, and from the viewpoint of improving workability, etc., generally, heat The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the curable component (K) is 10,000 or less, and preferably 100 or more and 10,000 or less.
The epoxy compound includes an epoxy compound (K1) having a reactive double bond group and an epoxy compound (K1 ') having no reactive double bond group. The thermosetting agent includes a thermosetting agent (K2) having a reactive double bond group and a thermosetting agent (K2 ') having no reactive double bond group. When the thermosetting component (K) of this embodiment is a reactive double bond group, the epoxy compound (K1) having a reactive double bond group and the thermosetting agent (K2) having a reactive double bond group are used. At least one of them is included as an essential component.

(K1) An epoxy compound having a reactive double bond group
The epoxy compound (K1) having a reactive double bond group has an aromatic ring in order to improve the strength and heat resistance of the adhesive layer after thermal curing. Examples of the reactive double bond system possessed by the epoxy compound (K1) include vinyl, allyl, and (meth) acrylfluorenyl groups, more preferably (meth) acrylfluorenyl groups, and further Preferred is acrylfluorenyl.
The epoxy compound (K1) having such a reactive double bond group is, for example, a compound obtained by converting a part of the epoxy group of a polyfunctional epoxy compound into a group containing a reactive double bond group. Such a compound can be synthesized by, for example, adding an acrylic acid to an epoxy group. Alternatively, a compound containing a reactive double bond group is directly bonded to an aromatic ring or the like constituting the epoxy resin, and the like.
Here, examples of the epoxy compound (K1) having a reactive double bond group include a compound represented by the following formula (1), a compound represented by the following formula (2), or acrylic acid described later. A compound obtained by an addition reaction of an epoxy group in a part of an epoxy compound (K1 ′) having no reactive double bond group.

[In formula (1), R is H- or CH 3 -, N is an integer of 0 or more and 10 or less. ]


In formula (2), R is H- or CH 3 -, N is an integer of 0 or more and 10 or less. ]
The epoxy compound (K1) having a reactive double bond which can be obtained by reacting an epoxy compound (K1 ') having no reactive double bond group with acrylic acid is a compound that reacts with an unreacted substance or a ring. In the case where a mixture of compounds in which the oxygen group has been completely consumed is used, it is sufficient that the above compounds are substantially included in the present embodiment.

(K1 ') Epoxy compound without reactive double bond
As the epoxy compound (K1 ') having no reactive double bond group, a conventionally known epoxy compound can be used. Specific examples of such epoxy compounds include polyfunctional epoxy resins, bisphenol A diglycidyl ether, hydrogenated bisphenol A diglycidyl ether, o-cresol novolac-type epoxy resin, and Cyclopentadiene epoxy resin, biphenyl epoxy resin, bisphenol A epoxy resin, bisphenol F epoxy resin, phenylene skeleton epoxy resin and phenol novolac epoxy resin, etc. It has two or more functional epoxy compounds in the molecule. These epoxy compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The number average molecular weight of the epoxy compounds (K1) and (K1 ') is not particularly limited. The number average molecular weights of the epoxy compounds (K1) and (K1 ') are independent of each other, and from the viewpoint of the hardenability of the adhesive layer and the viewpoint of the strength and heat resistance of the cured adhesive layer, it is preferably 300. The above is more than 30,000, more preferably 400 or more and 10,000 or less, and even more preferably 500 or more and 10,000 or less. The content of the reactive double bond group in the total amount of the epoxy compounds (K1) and (K1 ') [(K1) + (K1')] is relative to the total amount of the epoxy compounds (K1) and (K1 '). The epoxy group with 100 mol is 0.1 mol or more and 1000 mol or less, preferably 1 mol or more and 500 mol or less, and more preferably 10 mol or more and 400 mol or less. If the content of the reactive double bond group in the total amount of the epoxy compounds (K1) and (K1 ') exceeds 1,000 mol, there is a possibility that the thermosetting property becomes insufficient. In this specification, the number average molecular weight can be determined as a standard polystyrene conversion value obtained by gel · permeation · chromatography (GPC) using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent.
The thermosetting agent functions as a curing agent for the epoxy compounds (K1) and (K1 ').

(K2) Thermosetting agent with reactive double bond group
The thermosetting agent (K2) having a reactive double bond group is a thermosetting agent having a polymerizable carbon-carbon double bond group. As a reactive double bond system which the thermosetting agent (K2) has, a vinyl group, an allyl group, a (meth) acrylfluorenyl group, etc. are mentioned preferably, A methacrylfluorenyl group is more preferable.
The thermosetting agent (K2) contains a functional group capable of reacting with an epoxy group in addition to the above-mentioned reactive double bond group. Examples of the functional group capable of reacting with an epoxy group include a phenolic hydroxyl group, an alcoholic hydroxyl group, an amine group, a carboxyl group, and an acid anhydride group. Among these, a phenolic hydroxyl group and an alcoholic group are particularly preferred. A hydroxyl group and an amine group, and further preferably a phenolic hydroxyl group.
Examples of the thermosetting agent (K2) having a reactive double bond group include a compound in which a part of a hydroxyl group of a phenol resin is substituted with a group containing a reactive double bond group, or a reactive double bond A compound in which a radical is directly bonded to an aromatic ring of a phenol resin, and the like. Here, examples of the phenol resin include a novolac phenol resin, a dicyclopentadiene phenol resin, and a polyfunctional phenol resin, and the novolac phenol resin is particularly preferred. Therefore, examples of the thermosetting agent (K2) having a reactive double bond group include compounds in which a part of a hydroxyl group of a novolac phenol resin is substituted with a group containing a reactive double bond group, or a reaction including a reaction Compounds in which a radical double bond group is directly bonded to an aromatic ring of a novolac phenol resin are preferred.
A particularly preferable example of the thermosetting agent (K2) having a reactive double bond group is a structure in which a reactive double bond group is introduced into a part of a repeating unit containing a phenolic hydroxyl group as shown in the following formula (a), A compound containing a repeating unit having a group containing a reactive double bond group as in the following formula (b) or (c). A particularly preferred thermosetting agent (K2) having a reactive double bond group includes a repeating unit of the following formula (a) and a repeating unit of the following formula (b) or (c).

(In formula (a), n is 0 or 1.)

(In formulae (b) and (c), n is independently 0 or 1.
In formula (b) and formula (c), R 1 X is a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms independently of each other, and X is each independently, and there are -O- and -NR 2 -(R 2 Is hydrogen or methyl), and R 1 When X is a single bond, A is a (meth) acrylfluorenyl group. )
The phenolic hydroxyl group-containing functional group capable of reacting with an epoxy group contained in the repeating unit (a) has a function as a hardener that reacts and hardens with an epoxy group of an epoxy compound during thermal curing of the adhesive layer. The reactive double bond group contained in the repeating units (b) and (c) improves the compatibility between the acrylic polymer (J1) and the thermosetting component (K), and at the same time, the reactive double bond groups are added to each other Polymerize to form a three-dimensional mesh structure in the adhesive layer. As a result, the hardened material of the adhesive layer (the cured adhesive layer (protective film)) has a strong and tough property, and thus the reliability of the semiconductor device is improved. In addition, the reactive double bond group system included in the repeating units (b) and (c) also functions to polymerize and harden the adhesive layer when energy-curing the adhesive layer, thereby reducing the adhesive force between the adhesive layer and the substrate.
The proportion of the repeating unit represented by the formula (a) of the heat curing agent (K2) is preferably 5 mol% or more and 95 mol% or less, more preferably 20 mol% or more and 90 mol. % Or less, more preferably 40 mol% or more and 80 mol% or less, and based on the proportion of the repeating unit represented by the formula (b) or (c) above, it is preferably 5 mol% or more and 95 mol. The ears are less than 10%, more preferably 10% or more and 80% or less, more preferably 20% or more and 60% or less.

(K2 ') Thermosetting agent without reactive double bond group
Examples of the thermosetting agent (K2 ′) having no reactive double bond group include compounds having two or more functional groups capable of reacting with epoxy groups in one molecule. Examples of the functional group include a phenolic hydroxyl group, an alcoholic hydroxyl group, an amine group, a carboxyl group, and an acid anhydride group. Among these, a phenolic hydroxyl group, an amino group, an acid anhydride group, etc. are mentioned preferably, and a phenolic hydroxyl group and an amine group are more preferably mentioned.
Specific examples of the thermosetting agent (amine-based thermosetting agent) having an amine group include DICY (dicyanodiamine).
Specific examples of the thermosetting agent (phenol-based thermosetting agent) having a phenolic hydroxyl group include polyfunctional phenol resins, biphenols, novolac-type phenol resins, dicyclopentadiene-based phenol resins, and arane. Based phenol resin.
The thermosetting agent (K2 ') which does not have a reactive double bond group can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types.
The number average molecular weight of the above-mentioned thermosetting agents (K2) and (K2 ') is preferably 40 or more and 30,000 or less, more preferably 60 or more and 10,000 or less, and even more preferably 80 or more and 10,000 or less.
The content of the total [(K2) and (K2 ')] of the thermosetting agents (K2) and (K2') in the adhesive layer is relative to the total of the epoxy compounds (K1) and (K1 ') [(K1) And (K1 ')] of 100 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 parts by mass or more and 500 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 1 part by mass or more and 200 parts by mass or less. If the content of the thermosetting agent is small, there is a concern that the hardening is insufficient and the adhesiveness cannot be obtained. The content of the thermosetting agents [(K2) and (K2 ')] is preferably 1 part by mass or more and 50 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymer component (J), 2 parts by mass or more, It is more preferably 40 parts by mass or less. If the content of the thermosetting agent is small, there is a concern that the hardening is insufficient and the adhesiveness cannot be obtained.
The thermosetting component (K) (the total of the epoxy compound and the thermosetting agent [(K1) + (K1 ') + (K2) + (K2')]) is in the entire mass of the adhesive layer, and is preferably It is contained in a proportion of less than 50% by mass, more preferably 1% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less, further preferably 5% by mass or more and 25% by mass or less. In addition, in the adhesive layer system, the thermosetting component (K) is preferably contained in an amount of 1 part by mass or more and less than 105 parts by mass, and more preferably 1 part by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the polymer component (J). It is preferably contained in an amount of 3 parts by mass or more and 60 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 3 parts by mass or more and 40 parts by mass or less. In particular, when the content of the thermosetting component (K) has been reduced, for example, it is set to a range of 3 parts by mass or more and 40 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymer component (J). In the case of the degree of inclusion, the following effects can be obtained. The semiconductor wafer is fixed to the adhesive layer, and even if the adhesive layer is exposed to a high temperature before the adhesive layer is thermally hardened, the possibility of void generation in the adhesive layer can be reduced in the thermal curing step. When there is too much content of a thermosetting component (K), there exists a possibility that sufficient adhesiveness cannot be obtained.

(K3) Hardening accelerator
The hardening accelerator (K3) can also be used for adjusting the hardening speed of the adhesive layer. The hardening accelerator (K3) is particularly preferably used when an epoxy-based thermosetting component is used as the thermosetting component (K).
A preferable hardening accelerator is at least one selected from the group consisting of tertiary amines, imidazoles, organic phosphines, and tetraphenylboron salts. Examples of the tertiary amines include triethylenediamine, benzyldimethylamine, triethanolamine, dimethylaminoethanol, and ginsyl (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol. Examples of the imidazoles include 2-methylimidazole, 2-phenylimidazole, 2-phenyl-4-methylimidazole, 2-phenyl-4,5-dimethylol imidazole, and 2-phenyl 4-methyl-5-hydroxymethylimidazole and the like. Examples of the organic phosphine-based system include tributylphosphine, diphenylphosphine, and triphenylphosphine. Examples of the tetraphenylboronate system include tetraphenylphosphonium tetraphenylborate and triphenylphosphinetetraphenylborate. A hardening accelerator can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types.
When using a hardening accelerator (K3), the hardening accelerator (K3) is a total of ((K1) + (K1 ') + (K2) + (K2')) with respect to the total of the thermosetting component (K). In terms of parts, it is preferably contained in an amount of 0.01 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less, and more preferably in an amount of 0.1 parts by mass or more and 2.5 parts by mass or less. When the hardening accelerator (K3) is contained in an amount within the above range, the adhesive layer has excellent adhesive properties even when exposed to high temperature and high humidity conditions. When the hardening accelerator (K3) is contained in an amount within the above range, when the adhesive layer is used to form a hardened adhesive layer (protective film) for protecting the back surface of a face down semiconductor wafer, The backside protection function of the wafer is excellent. If the content of the hardening accelerator (K3) is small, there is a possibility that the hardening is insufficient and sufficient adhesion characteristics cannot be obtained.
The adhesive layer system may contain the following components in addition to the adhesive component having a reactive double bond group.

(L) Filling material
The adhesive layer system may contain a filler (L). By blending the filler (L) with the adhesive layer, the thermal expansion coefficient of the cured adhesive layer (protective film) obtained by curing the adhesive layer can be adjusted to optimize the cured adhesive layer (protective film) for the workpiece. The thermal expansion coefficient of) can improve the reliability of semiconductor devices. Moreover, it is also possible to reduce the hygroscopicity of a hardening adhesive layer (protective film).
In addition, when the hardened adhesive layer (protective film) obtained by hardening the adhesive layer of this embodiment functions as a protective film for a workpiece or a wafer having a sheet-shaped workpiece, the protective film is applied. When the laser mark is applied, the filler material (L) is exposed at the portion that has been scraped by the laser light, and the reflected light diffuses, so that the color is close to white. Therefore, if the adhesive layer contains a coloring agent (I) described later, the contrast between the laser marking portion and other portions is poor, and the effect of printing becomes clear.
Preferred filling materials (L) include powders of silicon dioxide, aluminum oxide, talc, calcium carbonate, titanium oxide, iron oxide, silicon carbide, and boron nitride. These powders are spherical beads. , Single crystal fiber and glass fiber. Among these fillers, a silica filler and an alumina filler are preferred. The filler (L) can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
In order to obtain the above-mentioned effect more surely, the range of the content of the filler (L) is in the entire mass of the adhesive layer, preferably 1% by mass or more, 80% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or more, 75% by mass or less. In the case of using the adhesive layer to form a protective film for protecting the back surface of a face-down semiconductor wafer, the content of the filler (L) is considered from the viewpoint of improving the protection function of the back surface of the wafer. The total mass of the adhesive layer is particularly preferably 40% by mass or more and 70% by mass or less.
In the filler (L) of the present embodiment, the surface is preferably modified with a compound having a reactive double bond group. Hereinafter, the filler which modifies the surface with a compound having a reactive double bond group will be described as “a filler having a reactive double bond group on the surface”.
The reactive double bond-based vinyl, allyl, or (meth) acrylfluorenyl group possessed by the filler (L) is preferred.
Examples of the untreated filler used as a filler having a reactive double bond group on its surface include calcium silicate, magnesium hydroxide, aluminum hydroxide, titanium oxide, talc, and mica in addition to the filler (L) described above. And clay. Among these filling materials, silicon dioxide is preferred. The silanol group of silicon dioxide effectively acts as a bond with a silane coupling agent described later.
A filler having a reactive double bond group on its surface is obtained by, for example, surface-treating the surface of an untreated filler with a coupling agent having a reactive double bond group.
The coupling agent system having the above-mentioned reactive double bond group is not particularly limited. As the coupling agent, for example, a coupling agent having a vinyl group, a coupling agent having a styrene group, and a coupling agent having a (meth) acrylic fluorenyloxy group are suitably used. The coupling agent is preferably a silane coupling agent.
Specific examples of the coupling agent include vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane, p-styryltrimethoxysilane, and 3-methacryloxypropyldimethoxy. Silane, 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane And 3-propenyloxypropyltrimethoxysilane. Examples of such commercially available products include KBM-1003, KBE-1003, KBM-1403, KBM-502, KBM-503, KBE-502, KBE-503, and KBM-5103 (these are all Shin-Etsu Chemical Industries Company).
The method of surface-treating the said filler with the said coupling agent is not specifically limited. As this method, for example, an untreated filler is added to a high-speed stirring mixer such as a Henschel mixer or a V-type mixer, and the coupling agent is directly or dissolved and dispersed in an alcohol while stirring. A dry method of adding an aqueous solution, an organic solvent, or an aqueous solution. Further, other methods include a slurry method in which a coupling agent is added to a slurry of an untreated filler material, a direct treatment method such as a spray method in which a coupling agent is sprayed after the untreated filler material is dried, or In the preparation of the above composition, an integral blending method in which an untreated filler and an acrylic polymer are mixed, and a coupling agent is directly added during the mixing.
A preferable lower limit of the amount of the surface-treated coupling agent of 100 parts by mass of the untreated filler is 0.1 part by mass, and a preferable upper limit is 15 parts by mass. If the amount of the coupling agent is less than 0.1 parts by mass, there is a possibility that the untreated filler material with the above-mentioned coupling agent is not sufficiently surface-treated and exhibits no effect.
In addition, the filler material having a reactive double bond group on the surface has excellent affinity with a binder component having a reactive double bond group, and can be uniformly dispersed in the adhesive layer.
The filler material having a reactive double bond group on the surface is included in the entire mass of the adhesive layer, and is preferably contained in a proportion of less than 50% by mass, and more preferably contained in a proportion of 1% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less. Furthermore, it is more preferable to include it in the ratio of 5 mass% or more and 25 mass% or less. The filler is preferably contained in a range of 5 parts by mass or more and less than 100 parts by mass, and more preferably 8 parts by mass, with respect to 100 parts by mass of the binder component. It is included in the range of 60 mass parts or more, and more preferably in the range of 10 mass parts or more and 40 mass parts or less. If the amount of the filler having a reactive double bond group on the surface is too large, there is a concern that the adhesion to the workpiece or the adhesion to the substrate may be deteriorated. If the amount of the filler having a reactive double bond group on the surface is too small, there is a concern that the effect of the filler addition is not sufficiently exhibited.
The average particle diameter of the filler (L) is preferably in a range of 0.01 μm or more and 10 μm or less, and more preferably in a range of 0.01 μm or more and 0.2 μm or less. When the average particle diameter of the filler is within the above range, adhesion can be exhibited without impairing the adhesion to the workpiece. If the average particle diameter is too large, there is a possibility that the surface state of the flakes is deteriorated and the in-plane thickness of the adhesive layer is scattered.
In addition, the said "average particle diameter" is calculated | required by the particle size distribution meter (made by Nikkiso Co., Ltd .; device name; Nanotrac150) using the dynamic light scattering method.
By setting the average particle diameter of the filler to the above range, the effect of significantly improving the reliability of the package is presumed to be due to the following reasons.
When the average particle diameter of the filler is large, the structure formed by components other than the fillers buried between the fillers also becomes large. The components other than the filler are less cohesive than the filler. If the structure formed by a component other than the filler is large, there is a concern that the fracture may extend to a wide range when fracture occurs in a component other than the filler. On the other hand, if the filler is fine, the structure formed by components other than the filler is also fine. In that case, even if the fracture is caused by a component other than the filler, the filler having been collected in the fine structure prevents the fracture from progressing. As a result, there is a tendency that the fracture does not increase to a wide range. Furthermore, a reactive double bond group such as a methacryloxy group and the like included in the filler of the present embodiment forms a bond with a reactive double bond group included in a component other than the filler (for example, an adhesive component). If the filler is fine, the contact area between the filler and components other than the filler will increase. As a result, the bonding between the filler and the binder component tends to increase.

(I) Colorant
The colorant (I) can be blended in the adhesive layer. When the coloring agent is mixed and the semiconductor device is installed in the machine, the failure of the semiconductor device caused by infrared rays generated from the surrounding devices can be prevented. In addition, in the case where marking is performed on the hardening adhesive layer (protective film) by means of a laser mark or the like, a mark such as a character or a mark makes it easy to recognize. That is, the semiconductor device or semiconductor wafer on which the hardening adhesive layer (protective film) has been formed is attached to the surface of the hardening adhesive layer (protective film), and the type and the like are usually scraped by a laser marking method (by laser light) Method of protecting the surface of the film and printing)). The hardened adhesive layer (protective film) contains the coloring agent (I), and the contrast between the part of the hardened adhesive layer (protective film) that has been scraped by laser light and the unscratched part can be fully obtained, improving visual recognition. Sex.
As the colorant system, organic pigments, inorganic pigments, organic dyes, and inorganic dyes can be used. From the viewpoint of electromagnetic wave and infrared shielding properties as the colorant, black pigments are preferred. Examples of the black pigment system include carbon black, manganese dioxide, nigrosine, activated carbon, and the like, but are not limited thereto. From the viewpoint of improving the reliability of semiconductor devices, carbon black is particularly preferable. The colorant (I) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The blending amount of the colorant (I) is in the entire mass of the adhesive layer, preferably 0.1 mass% or more and 35 mass% or less, more preferably 0.5 mass% or more and 25 mass% or less, and further preferably 1 mass%. Above 15% by mass.

(M) Coupling agent
The coupling agent (M) having a functional group that reacts with an inorganic substance and a functional group that reacts with an organic functional group may be used in order to improve the adhesion and adhesion of the adhesive layer to the workpiece, and to improve the adhesion of the adhesive layer. Improve cohesion and use. In addition, by using the coupling agent (M), the water resistance can be improved without impairing the heat resistance of the hardened adhesive layer (protective film). Examples of such coupling agents include titanate-based coupling agents, aluminate-based coupling agents, and silane coupling agents. Among these coupling agents, a silane coupling agent is particularly preferred.
The silane coupling agent is a group that reacts with a functional group having a polymer component (J), a thermosetting component (K), and the like, and preferably has a functional group that reacts with an organic functional group.
Examples of such a silane coupling agent system include a low-molecular-weight silane coupling agent having two or three alkoxy groups, bis (3-triethoxysilylpropyl) tetrasulfane, and vinyltriethoxy. Silane and imidazole silane. Examples of the low-molecular-weight silane coupling agent system having two or three alkoxy groups include γ-glycidyloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-glycidyloxypropyltriethoxysilane, and γ-glycidyl. Glyceryloxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, β- (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrimethoxysilane, γ- (methacryloxypropyl) trimethoxysilane, γ -Aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, N-6- (aminoethyl) -γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, N-6- (aminoethyl) -γ-aminopropylmethyl Didiethoxysilane, N-phenyl-γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-ureidopropyltriethoxysilane, γ-mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-mercaptopropyl Methyldimethoxysilane, methyltrimethoxysilane, methyltriethoxysilane and vinyltrimethoxysilane. Examples of the silane coupling agent include hydrolysis of the above-mentioned low-molecular-weight silane coupling agent having 2 or 3 alkoxy groups, and low-molecular-weight silane coupling agent having 4 alkoxy groups, etc., by hydrolysis of the alkoxy group. And an oligomeric silane coupling agent of a product condensed by dehydration condensation. In particular, among the above-mentioned low-molecular-weight silane coupling agents, a low-molecular-weight silane coupling agent having 2 or 3 alkoxy groups and a low-molecular-weight silane coupling agent having 4 alkoxy groups are condensed by dehydration condensation. The oligomer of the product is rich in alkoxy group reactivity, and is preferable because it has a sufficient number of organic functional groups. Examples of such an oligomer include an oligomer of a copolymer of 3- (2,3-glycidoxy) propylmethoxysiloxane and dimethoxysiloxane.
These silane coupling agents can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The silane coupling agent is usually 0.1 parts by mass or more and 20 parts by mass or less, preferably 0.2 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less, more preferably 0.3 parts by mass or more, based on 100 parts by mass of the adhesive component. Included in proportions by mass or less. If the content of the silane coupling agent is less than 0.1 parts by mass, the above-mentioned effects may not be obtained, and if it exceeds 20 parts by mass, there may be a cause of outgassing.

(N) Crosslinking agent
In order to adjust the initial adhesive force and cohesive force of the adhesive layer, a crosslinking agent (N) may be added to the adhesive layer. In the case of formulating a crosslinking agent, the acrylic polymer (J1) contains a reactive functional group.
Examples of the crosslinking agent (N) include organic polyisocyanate compounds and organic polyimide compounds. Examples of the cross-linking agent (N) include the same cross-linking agents as those exemplified as the cross-linking agent (B) described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-027655.
When an isocyanate-based crosslinking agent is used, it is preferable to use an acrylic polymer (J1) having a hydroxyl group as a reactive functional group. When the cross-linking agent has an isocyanate group and the acrylic polymer (J1) has a hydroxyl group, a reaction between the cross-linking agent and the acrylic polymer (J1) occurs, and a cross-linking structure can be easily introduced into the adhesive layer.
When a cross-linking agent (N) is used, the cross-linking agent (N) is generally 0.01 mass part or more and 20 mass parts or less, preferably 0.1 mass based on 100 mass parts of the acrylic polymer (J1). It is used at a ratio of not less than 10 parts by mass and more preferably not less than 0.5 part by mass and not more than 5 parts by mass.

(P) Photopolymerization initiator
A photopolymerization initiator (P) may be blended in the adhesive layer system. Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator (P) include those similar to the photopolymerization initiator (E) described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-027655.
In the case of using a photopolymerization initiator (P), the mixing ratio is suitably based on the total amount of the reactive double bond group on the surface of the aforementioned filler (L) and the reactive double bond group having a binder component, and is suitably Just set it. The proportion of the photopolymerization initiator (P) is not limited. The proportion of the photopolymerization initiator (P) is, for example, 100 parts by mass with respect to a total of 100 parts by mass of the polymer component having a reactive double bond group, the thermosetting component having a reactive double bond group, and the filler. The photopolymerization initiator (P) is usually 0.1 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less, preferably 1 part by mass or more and 5 parts by mass or less. If the content of the photopolymerization initiator (P) is lower than the above range, there is a concern that the reaction cannot be satisfied due to insufficient photopolymerization. If the content is higher than the above range, a residue that does not contribute to photopolymerization is generated. The hardenability of the agent layer becomes an insufficient doubt.

(M) Universal additive
In addition to the above-mentioned adhesive layer system, various additives can be blended as necessary. Examples of the various additive systems include the general-purpose additive (I) and the release agent described in the first embodiment.
The adhesive layer is obtained, for example, by using a composition (a second adhesive composition) which can be obtained by mixing the above-mentioned respective components in an appropriate ratio. The second adhesive composition is first diluted with a solvent in advance, or may be added to the solvent during mixing. When the second adhesive composition is used, it may be diluted with a solvent.
Examples of such a solvent system include ethyl acetate, methyl acetate, diethyl ether, dimethyl ether, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, acetonitrile, hexane, cyclohexane, toluene, and heptane.
The thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably 1 μm or more and 100 μm or less, more preferably 2 μm or more and 90 μm or less, and further preferably 3 μm or more and 80 μm or less. The thickness of the adhesive layer is set to the above range, and the adhesive layer functions as a highly reliable adhesive or protective film.

(Manufacturing method of semiconductor device)
FIGS. 3 (FIGS. 3A to 3D) and 4 (FIGS. 4A to 4D) are diagrams showing an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment.
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, an adhesive laminate 1 including a substrate 11 and an adhesive layer 12 is used.
It is preferable that the adhesive layer 12 contains a hardening type adhesive which is hardened by receiving external energy. Examples of the externally supplied energy system include ultraviolet rays, electron beams, and heat. It is preferable that the adhesive layer 12 contains at least any one of an ultraviolet curing adhesive and a thermosetting adhesive. In this embodiment, the adhesive system contained in the adhesive layer 12 is preferably the second adhesive composition described above, for example.

‧Semiconductor wafer attaching steps
FIG. 3A is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step (semiconductor wafer attaching step) of attaching the semiconductor wafer CP to the adhesive layer 12 of the adhesive layer 1. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3A, a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP are attached to the adhesive layer 12. When the semiconductor wafers CP are attached, they can be attached individually, or a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP can be attached at the same time.
The semiconductor wafer CP used in this embodiment has a circuit surface W1 on which a connection terminal W3 is provided, and a wafer back surface W2 which is a back surface of an element on the opposite side to the circuit surface W1. In this embodiment, the circuit surface W1 is attached to the adhesive layer 12.

‧Reinforcement frame attaching steps
This embodiment is also the same as the first embodiment, and it is preferable to further include a step (reinforcing frame attaching step) of attaching the reinforcing frame 2 to the laminated body 1 (refer to FIG. 3A). The shape of the reinforcing frame 2 is not particularly limited, and an example of the reinforcing frame 2 is the same as that of the first embodiment.
This embodiment is also the same as the first embodiment, and the step of attaching the reinforcing frame 2 may be performed before or after the step of attaching the semiconductor wafer CP to the laminated body 1.

‧Adhesive layer hardening step
FIG. 3B is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of curing the adhesive layer 12 to form a cured adhesive layer 12A (adhesive layer curing step). By hardening the adhesive layer 12, the semiconductor wafer CP is strongly bonded by hardening the adhesive layer 12A, and the movement of the semiconductor wafer CP in the subsequent resin sealing step can be suppressed.
The method of hardening the adhesive layer 12 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and it is preferable to appropriately select it according to the type of the adhesive contained in the adhesive layer 12.
In this embodiment, since the reinforcing frame 2 is attached to the adhesive layer 12, it is possible to suppress the deflection and curling of the adhesive laminate 1 due to the shrinkage of the adhesive layer 12 when it is cured. Therefore, before the step of hardening the adhesive layer 12 to form a hardened adhesive layer 12A, it is preferable to attach the reinforcing frame 2 to the adhesive layer 12.

‧Sealing step
FIG. 3C is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step (sealing step) of sealing a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP after the formation of the hardened adhesive layer 12A.
In this embodiment, the sealing body 3A is formed by covering the wafer back surface W2 side of the semiconductor wafer CP with a sealing member 30. A sealing member 30 is also filled between the plurality of semiconductor wafers CP. In this embodiment, since the reinforcing frame 2 is also taken into the inside of the sealing body 3A, the rigidity of the sealing body 3A is improved, and the warping of the semiconductor package generated after the resin sealing can be suppressed.
The method of sealing the plurality of semiconductor wafers CP using the sealing member 30 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the method described in the first embodiment.
Examples of the material of the sealing member 30 include the materials and compositions described in the first embodiment.
In this embodiment, an additional hardening step described in the first embodiment may be performed.

‧Substrate peeling step
The 3D diagram is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step (substrate peeling step) of peeling the substrate 11 adhering to the laminate 1 after sealing a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP.
In this embodiment, the hardened adhesive layer 12A is left in the sealed body 3A, and the base material 11 is peeled from the sealed body 3A.

‧Procedure for connecting terminal exposure
FIG. 4A is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of exposing the connection terminal W3 of the semiconductor wafer CP on the surface of the sealing body 3A (the connection terminal exposing step).
In this embodiment, a part or the whole of the hardened adhesive layer 12A of the sealing body 3A covering the circuit surface W1 of the semiconductor wafer CP or the connection terminal W3 is removed to expose the connection terminal W3. The method of exposing the connection terminal W3 of the semiconductor wafer CP is not particularly limited. Examples of a method of exposing the connection terminal W3 of the semiconductor wafer CP include a method of removing the hardening adhesive layer 12A by laser irradiation and the like to expose the connection terminal W3, and removing hardening by an etching method. Method for exposing the connection layer W3 to the agent layer 12A and the like. In this embodiment, if it can be electrically connected to a redistribution layer described later, the entire connection terminal W3 can be exposed, and a part of the connection terminal W3 can also be exposed.

‧Re-wiring layer formation steps
FIG. 4B is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step (rewiring layer forming step) of forming a rewiring layer 4 electrically connected to the semiconductor wafer CP.
In this embodiment, the redistribution layer 4 and the connection terminal W3 exposed on the surface of the sealing body 3A are electrically connected. In this embodiment, the redistribution layer 4 is formed on the circuit surface W1 and on the surface 3S of the sealing body 3A. The method for forming the redistribution layer 4 may be a method generally known in the past.
The redistribution layer 4 includes an external electrode pad 41 for connecting external terminal electrodes. In this embodiment, the external electrode pads 41 are formed in a plurality of places. In this embodiment, an external electrode pad 41 is also formed that is fan-out outside the area of the semiconductor wafer CP.

‧External terminal electrode connection steps
FIG. 4C is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step (external terminal electrode connection step) of electrically connecting the external terminal electrode 5 to the redistribution layer 4.
In this embodiment, the external terminal electrode 5 is placed on the external electrode pad 41, and a solder ball or the like is placed thereon, and the external terminal electrode 5 and the external electrode pad 41 are electrically connected by soldering or the like. The material of the solder ball is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include lead-containing solder and lead-free solder.

‧Single chip step
FIG. 4D is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of singulating the sealing body 3A to which the external terminal electrode 5 is connected (singulating step).
The method of singulating the sealing body 3A is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the same method as in the first embodiment. The step of singulating the sealing body 3A may be performed by attaching the sealing body 3A to an adhesive sheet such as a dicing sheet.
In this embodiment, a semiconductor package 100A including a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP is manufactured by singulating the sealing body 3A into a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP. The semiconductor package 100A-based hardening adhesive layer 12A is provided on the circuit surface W1 of the semiconductor wafer CP. That is, the adhesive layer 12 of the adhesive laminate 1 is not used for temporary fixing to be peeled off after the resin is sealed, but is included as a part of the semiconductor package 100A as a hardened adhesive layer 12A firmly adhered to the semiconductor wafer CP.
In this embodiment, since the external terminal electrode 5 is connected to the external electrode pad 41 outside the area from the fan-out to the semiconductor wafer CP, the semiconductor package 100A can be used as a fan-out type wafer-level package ( FO-WLP).

‧installation steps
It is also preferable that the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment includes a step of mounting the semiconductor package 100A on a printed circuit board (there may be a mounting step).

‧ Effect of implementation form
The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment. Compared with the method using an adhesive tape as described in Document 1, the semiconductor chip CP can be suppressed from being pressed by the pressure during resin sealing. The specified position deviation can simplify the manufacturing steps.
In addition, since the hardened adhesive layer 12A has rigidity, the rigidity of the sealing body 3A is improved, and it is possible to suppress the semiconductor package from being bent after the resin is sealed.

[Third Embodiment]
The manufacturing method of the semiconductor device of this embodiment is a manufacturing method using an adhesive laminate which includes a substrate and an adhesive layer, and further includes an adhesive layer between the adhesive layer and the substrate. The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment includes a step of attaching a plurality of the semiconductor elements to the above-mentioned adhesive layer of the laminate, a step of curing the adhesive layer to form a cured adhesive layer, A step of sealing a plurality of the semiconductor elements to form a sealing body having a sealing resin layer; a step of peeling the base material from the sealing body without peeling the hardening adhesive layer from the sealing body; A step of a wiring layer, and a step of electrically connecting an external terminal electrode to the redistribution layer.
The step of peeling the substrate from the sealing body is not a step of peeling the hardening adhesive layer from the sealing body, but a step of peeling at an interface between the adhesive layer and the hardening adhesive layer.

(Laminated)
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, an adhesive laminate 1A (see FIG. 5A) including a substrate 11, an adhesive layer 12, and an adhesive layer 13 is used.

(Base material)
The substrate 11 is not particularly limited, and for example, the same substrate as that described in the first embodiment can be used.

(Adhesive layer)
It is preferable that the adhesive layer 12 contains a hardening type adhesive which is hardened by receiving external energy. Examples of the externally supplied energy system include ultraviolet rays, electron beams, and heat. It is preferable that the adhesive layer 12 contains at least any one of an ultraviolet curing adhesive and a thermosetting adhesive. In this embodiment, the adhesive agent contained in the adhesive agent layer 12 is, for example, at least one of the adhesive agent composition of the aforementioned first adhesive agent composition and the aforementioned second adhesive agent composition.

(Adhesive layer)
The adhesive layer 13 is included between the substrate 11 and the adhesive layer 12. In the adhesive laminate 1A, the adhesive layer 12 is laminated on the adhesive layer 13 provided on the substrate 11.
The adhesive layer 13 may be formed of a weakly adhesive adhesive having a degree of adhesive force capable of peeling off the adhesive layer 12, and may also be formed of an energy ray-hardenable adhesive having reduced adhesive force by irradiation with energy rays. When an adhesive layer made of an energy-ray-curable adhesive is used, the region where the adhesive layer 12 is laminated (for example, the inner peripheral portion of the substrate 11) is irradiated with energy rays in advance to make the adhesive. It is lowered, and energy rays are not irradiated to other regions (for example, the outer periphery of the substrate 11). For example, for the purpose of connecting to a jig, the adhesive force can be maintained at a high level. For example, an energy ray shielding layer may be provided in a region corresponding to the other regions of the substrate 11 by printing or the like, and energy ray irradiation may be performed from the substrate 11 side. .
The adhesive layer 13 can be formed by various adhesives which are generally known in the past. The adhesive layer 13 is formed, for example, by selecting at least any one of a group consisting of a general-purpose adhesive, an energy-ray-curable adhesive, and an adhesive containing a thermal expansion component. As the general-purpose adhesive system, for example, at least any one selected from the group consisting of a rubber-based adhesive, an acrylic-based adhesive, a silicone-based adhesive, a urethane-based adhesive, and a vinyl ether-based adhesive. An adhesive is preferred. The form of the adhesive layer 13 also includes a form having a core material and an adhesive layer provided on both sides of the core material.
The adhesive layer 13 is also preferably a thermally expandable adhesive layer. The thermally expandable adhesive layer is formed with a thermally expandable adhesive. The thermally expandable adhesive contains an adhesive and a thermally expandable component. In the case where the adhesive layer 13 is a thermally expandable adhesive layer, the contact area between the thermally expandable adhesive layer and the adherend is reduced by heating, and the adhesive force can be reduced. As the thermally expandable component system, thermally expandable fine particles can be used. The thermally expandable microparticles are, for example, microparticles made of a substance that is easily vaporized and expanded by heating, and is contained in an elastic shell. Examples of the material system that expands due to vaporization include isobutane, propane, and pentane. In particular, the thermally expandable microparticles are easy to control the surface shape of the adhesive layer after thermal expansion, thereby changing the state of the adhesive layer from a strongly adhesive state to a state easily peeled by heating, so that Better. Moreover, you may use a foaming agent as a heat-expandable component system. The foaming agent is, for example, a chemical substance that undergoes thermal decomposition and has the ability to generate a gas. Examples of the generated gas system include water, carbonic acid gas, and nitrogen. By dispersing the foaming agent in the adhesive, an effect similar to that of the thermally expandable fine particles is exhibited.
The thickness of the adhesive layer 13 is not particularly limited. The thickness of the adhesive layer 13 is usually 1 μm or more and 50 μm or less, and preferably 5 μm or more and 30 μm or less.

(Manufacturing method of semiconductor device)
Fig. 5 (Figs. 5A to 5E) is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment.
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, an adhesive laminate 1A is used.

‧Semiconductor wafer attaching steps
FIG. 5A is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of attaching the semiconductor wafer CP to the adhesive layer 12 of the adhesive layer 1A (semiconductor wafer attaching step). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5B, a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP are attached to the adhesive layer 12. When the semiconductor wafers CP are attached, they can be attached individually, or a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP can be attached at the same time.
The semiconductor wafer CP used in this embodiment has a circuit surface W1 on which a connection terminal W3 is provided, and a wafer back surface W2 which is a back surface of an element on the opposite side to the circuit surface W1. In this embodiment, the wafer back surface W2 is attached to the adhesive layer 12.

‧Reinforcement frame attaching steps
This embodiment is also the same as the first embodiment, and it is preferable to further include a step of attaching the reinforcing frame 2 to the laminated body 1A (reinforcing frame attaching step) (refer to FIGS. 5A and 5B). The shape of the reinforcing frame 2 is not particularly limited, and an example of the reinforcing frame 2 is the same as that of the first embodiment.
In this embodiment, the step of attaching the reinforcing frame 2 is also the same as in the first embodiment, and may be performed before the step of attaching the semiconductor wafer CP to the laminated body 1A, or the semiconductor wafer CP may be attached to the adhesive layer. The step of the laminate 1A is performed afterwards.

‧Adhesive layer hardening step
FIG. 5C is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of curing the adhesive layer 12 to form a cured adhesive layer 12A (adhesive layer curing step). By hardening the adhesive layer 12, the semiconductor wafer CP is strongly bonded by hardening the adhesive layer 12A, and the movement of the semiconductor wafer CP in the subsequent resin sealing step can be suppressed.
The method of hardening the adhesive layer 12 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and it is preferable to appropriately select it according to the type of the adhesive contained in the adhesive layer 12.
Also in this embodiment, since the reinforcing frame 2 is adhered to the adhesive layer 12, it is possible to suppress the deflection and curling of the adhesive laminate 1A caused by the shrinkage when the adhesive layer 12 is hardened. Therefore, before the step of hardening the adhesive layer 12 to form a hardened adhesive layer 12A, it is preferable to attach the reinforcing frame 2 to the adhesive layer 12.

‧Sealing step
FIG. 5D is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step (sealing step) of sealing a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP after the formation of the hardened adhesive layer 12A.
In this embodiment, the circuit surface W1 side of the semiconductor wafer CP is covered with the sealing member 30 to form the sealing body 3. A sealing member 30 is also filled between the plurality of semiconductor wafers CP. In this embodiment, since the reinforcing frame 2 is also taken into the inside of the sealing body 3, the rigidity of the sealing body 3 is improved, and it is possible to suppress the semiconductor package from being bent after the resin is sealed.
The method of sealing the plurality of semiconductor wafers CP using the sealing member 30 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the method described in the first embodiment. Examples of the material of the sealing member 30 include the materials and compositions described in the first embodiment.
In this embodiment, an additional hardening step described in the first embodiment may be performed. Alternatively, instead of performing an additional curing step, the sealing member 30 may be sufficiently cured by heating in the sealing step.

‧Stripping step
FIG. 5E is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of peeling the substrate 11 and the adhesive layer 13 of the laminated body 1A after sealing a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP (the case may be referred to as a peeling step).
In this embodiment, the hardened adhesive layer 12A is left on the sealing body 3, and the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 13 are peeled from the sealing body 3. Next, the laminate 1A is peelable at the interface between the adhesive layer 13 and the hardened adhesive layer 12A.
After the substrate peeling step, for example, a connection terminal exposing step (see FIG. 2A), a rewiring layer forming step (see FIG. 2B), and an external terminal electrode connection step (see FIG. 2C) are performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. (Fig. 2) and singulation step (see Fig. 2D), a semiconductor package 100 can be manufactured. In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, a mounting step may be performed.

‧ Effect of implementation form
According to the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, the same effect as that of the first embodiment is exhibited.
In addition, according to the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, the adhesive layer 1A includes the adhesive layer 13 between the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12, so that in the step of curing the adhesive layer, it is possible to Suppresses the floating of the substrate from the adhesive layer.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment is a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device using an adhesive sheet including a substrate and an adhesive layer, and an adhesive layer.
A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment includes a step of bonding a plurality of the adhesive layers of the semiconductor element to the adhesive layer of an adhesive sheet, and curing the adhesive layer to form a cured adhesive layer. A step of sealing a plurality of the semiconductor elements to form a sealing body having a sealing resin layer, a step of peeling the substrate from the sealing body without peeling the hardening adhesive layer from the sealing body, and forming an electrical connection with the semiconductor element A step of rewiring a layer, and a step of electrically connecting an external terminal electrode to the aforementioned redistribution layer.
The step of peeling the substrate from the sealing body is not a step of peeling the hardening adhesive layer from the sealing body, but a step of peeling at an interface between the adhesive layer and the hardening adhesive layer.
In this specification, the adhesive sheet system has a peelable adhesive force after being adhered to the adherend, and is different from an adhesive sheet system having an adhesive force that is firmly fixed to the adherend like an adhesive layer. .

(Adhesive sheet)
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, an adhesive sheet 1B (see FIG. 6A) including a substrate 11 and an adhesive layer 13 is used.

(Base material)
The substrate 11 is not particularly limited, and for example, the same substrate as that described in the first embodiment can be used.

(Adhesive layer)
The adhesive layer 13 is provided on the base material 11. As the adhesive layer 13, the same adhesive layer as the adhesive layer described in the third embodiment can be used.

(Manufacturing method of semiconductor device)
FIGS. 6 (FIGS. 6A to 6E) and 7 (FIGS. 7A to 7D) are diagrams showing an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment.
The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment uses an adhesive sheet 1B.

‧Semiconductor wafer attaching steps
FIG. 6A is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of attaching the semiconductor wafer CP to the adhesive layer 13 of the adhesive sheet 1B (semiconductor wafer attaching step).
The semiconductor wafer CP used in this embodiment has a circuit surface W1 on which a connection terminal W3 is provided, and a wafer back surface W2 which is a back surface of an element on the opposite side to the circuit surface W1. The adhesive layer 14 is provided on the wafer back surface W2 of the semiconductor wafer CP. As an adhesive agent contained in the adhesive agent layer 14, the adhesive agent composition of at least any one of the said 1st adhesive agent composition and the said 2nd adhesive agent composition is preferable, for example.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6B, a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP are attached to the adhesive layer 13 of the adhesive sheet 1B via the adhesive layer 14. When the semiconductor wafers CP are attached, they can be attached individually, or a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP can be attached at the same time.

‧Reinforcement frame attaching steps
In this embodiment, it is preferable to further include a step (reinforcing frame attaching step) of attaching the reinforcing frame 2 to the adhesive sheet 1B (refer to FIGS. 6A and 6B). By attaching the reinforcing frame 2 to the adhesive sheet 1B, the operability of the adhesive sheet 1B to which the semiconductor wafer CP is attached during the manufacturing process of the semiconductor device manufacturing method is improved.
The shape of the reinforcing frame 2 is not particularly limited, and an example of the reinforcing frame 2 is the same as that of the first embodiment.
In this embodiment, the step of attaching the reinforcing frame 2 may be performed before the step of attaching the semiconductor wafer CP to the adhesive sheet 1B, or may be performed after the step of attaching the semiconductor wafer CP to the adhesive sheet 1B.

‧Adhesive layer hardening step
FIG. 6C is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of curing the adhesive layer 14 to form a cured adhesive layer 14A (adhesive layer curing step). By hardening the adhesive layer 14, the semiconductor wafer CP is strongly adhered by curing the adhesive layer 14A, and the movement of the semiconductor wafer CP in the subsequent resin sealing step can be suppressed.
The method of hardening the adhesive layer 14 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and it is preferably selected as appropriate in accordance with the type of the adhesive contained in the adhesive layer 14.
Also in this embodiment, since the reinforcing frame 2 is attached to the adhesive sheet 1B, it is possible to suppress the deflection and curling of the adhesive sheet 1B due to shrinkage when the adhesive layer 14 is cured. Therefore, before the step of hardening the adhesive layer 14 to form a hardened adhesive layer 14A, it is preferable to attach the reinforcing frame 2 to the adhesive layer 13.

‧Sealing step
FIG. 6D is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step (sealing step) of sealing a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP after the formation of the hardened adhesive layer 14A.
In this embodiment, the circuit surface W1 side of the semiconductor wafer CP is covered with a sealing member 30 to form a sealing body 3B. A sealing member 30 is also filled between the plurality of semiconductor wafers CP. In the present embodiment, since the reinforcing frame 2 and the hardening adhesive layer 14A are placed inside the sealing body 3B, the rigidity of the sealing body 3B is improved, and it is possible to suppress bending of the semiconductor package generated after resin sealing. The method of sealing the plurality of semiconductor wafers CP using the sealing member 30 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the method described in the first embodiment. Examples of the material of the sealing member 30 include the materials and compositions described in the first embodiment.
In this embodiment, an additional hardening step described in the first embodiment may be performed. Alternatively, instead of performing an additional curing step, the sealing member 30 may be sufficiently cured by heating in the sealing step.

‧Adhesive sheet peeling step
FIG. 6E is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of peeling the adhesive sheet 1B after sealing a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP (the case may be referred to as an adhesive sheet peeling step).
In this embodiment, the hardened adhesive layer 14A is left on the sealing body 3B, and the adhesive sheet 1B (the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 13) is peeled from the sealing body 3B. The adhesive sheet 1B is peelable at the interface between the adhesive layer 13 and the hardening adhesive layer 14A.

‧Procedure for connecting terminal exposure
FIG. 7A is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of exposing the connection terminal W3 of the semiconductor wafer CP on the surface of the sealing body 3B (the connection terminal exposing step).
In this embodiment, a part or the whole of the sealing resin layer of the sealing body 3B covering the circuit surface W1 of the semiconductor wafer CP or the connection terminal W3 is removed to expose the connection terminal W3. The step of exposing the connection terminal in this embodiment can be performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

‧Re-wiring layer formation steps
FIG. 7B is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of forming a redistribution layer 4 electrically connected to the semiconductor wafer CP (a redistribution layer formation step).
In this embodiment, the redistribution layer 4 and the connection terminal W3 exposed on the surface of the sealing body 3B are electrically connected. The redistribution layer forming step in this embodiment can be performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment.
The redistribution layer 4 of this embodiment also includes an external electrode pad 41 for connecting external terminal electrodes. In this embodiment, the external electrode pads 41 are also formed in a plurality of places. In this embodiment, an external electrode pad 41 is also formed that is fan-out outside the area of the semiconductor wafer CP.

‧External terminal electrode connection steps
FIG. 7C is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step (external terminal electrode connection step) of electrically connecting the external terminal electrode 5 to the redistribution layer 4. The external terminal electrode connection step in this embodiment can be performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

‧Single chip step
FIG. 7D is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of singulating the sealing body 3B to which the external terminal electrode 5 is connected (a singulating step).
The method of singulating the sealing body 3B is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the same method as in the first embodiment. The step of singulating the sealing body 3B may be performed by attaching the sealing body 3B to an adhesive sheet such as a dicing sheet.
In this embodiment, a semiconductor package 100C including a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP is manufactured by singulating the sealing body 3B into a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP. The semiconductor package 100C-based hardening adhesive layer 14A is provided on the wafer back surface W2 of the semiconductor wafer CP. That is, the adhesive layer 14 provided on the wafer back surface W2 of the semiconductor wafer CP is not used for temporary fixing after being peeled off from the resin, but is hardly adhered to the semiconductor wafer CP as a hardened adhesive layer 14A and is included as a semiconductor Package part of 100C.
In this embodiment, since the external terminal electrode 5 is connected to the external electrode pad 41 outside the area of the fan-out to the semiconductor chip CP, the semiconductor package 100C can be used as a fan-out type wafer-level package. (FO-WLP).

‧installation steps
It is also preferable that the method of manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment includes a step of mounting the semiconductor package 100C on a printed circuit board or the like (the mounting step may be called).

‧ Effect of implementation form
According to the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, the same effect as that of the first embodiment is exhibited.
In addition, according to the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, the semiconductor wafer CP is attached to the adhesive sheet 1B via the adhesive layer 14 provided on the back surface W2 of the wafer. It is also possible to use a state in which the entire surface of the wafer before being turned into a wafer is laminated with an adhesive layer.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The manufacturing method of the semiconductor device of this embodiment is a manufacturing method using an adhesive laminate including a base material and an adhesive layer. The adhesive layer includes a first adhesive layer and a second adhesive layer. The materials of the first adhesive layer and the second adhesive layer are different from each other. In this embodiment, the second laminate layer is formed on the base material, and the second laminate layer is formed on the second adhesive layer to form an adhesive laminate of the first adhesive layer, which will be described as an example. In this embodiment, for example, a resin film can be used as the base material of the adhesive laminate.
A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment includes a step of attaching a hard support to the first adhesive layer, a step of peeling the substrate from the second adhesive layer, and attaching a plurality of semiconductor elements to the semiconductor device. The step of the second adhesive layer, the step of hardening the first adhesive layer to form a first hardened adhesive layer, and the step of hardening the second adhesive layer to form a second hardened adhesive layer, sealing a plurality of the semiconductors. A step of forming a sealing body having a sealing resin layer, a step of forming a rewiring layer electrically connected to the semiconductor element, a step of electrically connecting an external terminal electrode to the rewiring layer, and removing the first The second hardening adhesive layer is a step of removing the first hardening adhesive layer and the hard support; when a plurality of the semiconductor elements are attached to the adhesive laminate, a circuit having a connection terminal with the semiconductor element is connected. The back surface of the device on the opposite side is attached to the adhesive layer, and is formed by sealing the semiconductor device. Later seal, removing a portion covering the circuit surface of the sealing resin layer of the connection terminal is exposed, or the whole, so that the re-wiring layer is electrically connected to the exposed terminals of the connector.
In the step of peeling the substrate from the second adhesive layer, it is preferable to peel at the interface between the substrate and the second adhesive layer.
It is preferable to harden the first adhesive layer and the second adhesive layer by the same steps, and it is more preferable to harden them at the same time.

(Laminated)
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, a bonding laminate 1C (see FIG. 8A) including the substrate 11, the first adhesive layer 15, and the second adhesive layer 16 is used. The next laminate 1C is between the substrate 11 and the first adhesive layer 15 and includes a second adhesive layer 16.

(Base material)
The substrate 11 is not particularly limited, and for example, the same substrate as that described in the first embodiment can be used. In this embodiment, the base material 11 is preferably a material having flexibility. In this embodiment, a case where a resin film is used as the base material 11 is described as an example.

(Adhesive layer)
It is preferable that the first adhesive layer 15 and the second adhesive layer 16 contain a hardening type adhesive that is hardened by receiving external energy. Examples of the externally supplied energy system include ultraviolet rays, electron beams, and heat. Each of the first adhesive layer 15 and the second adhesive layer 16 is independent, and it is preferable that at least one of an ultraviolet curing adhesive and a thermal curing adhesive is contained. In this embodiment, the adhesives contained in the first adhesive layer 15 and the adhesives contained in the second adhesive layer 16 are independent of each other, for example, the first adhesive composition and the second adhesive. An adhesive composition of at least any one of the adhesive composition is preferable. The first adhesive layer 15 and the second adhesive layer 16 are preferably UV-curable adhesive layers. When the first adhesive layer 15 and the second adhesive layer 16 are UV-curable adhesive layers, it is preferable that the hard support 17 is formed of a material that can transmit ultraviolet rays.

(Manufacturing method of semiconductor device)
8 (FIGS. 8A to 8E) and 9 (FIGS. 9A to 9E) are diagrams showing an example of a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment.
In the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, an adhesive laminate 1C is used.

‧Steps for attaching rigid support
FIG. 8A is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating the step of attaching the hard support 17 to the first adhesive layer 15 (the step of attaching the hard support).
The material of the rigid support 17 may be appropriately determined in consideration of mechanical strength, heat resistance, and the like. Examples of the material of the hard support 17 include metal materials, non-metal inorganic materials, resin materials, and composite materials. Examples of the metal material include SUS. Examples of non-metallic inorganic materials include glass and silicon wafers. Examples of the resin material include epoxy resin, ABS, acrylic, engineering plastic, super engineering plastic, polyimide, polyimide, and the like. Examples of the composite material system include glass epoxy resin. Among these materials, SUS, glass, and silicon wafers are preferred. Examples of engineering plastics include nylon, polycarbonate (PC), and polyethylene terephthalate (PET). Examples of the super engineering plastics include polyphenylene sulfide (PPS), polyether fluorene (PES), and polyether ether ketone (PEEK).
The thickness of the rigid support 17 may be appropriately determined in consideration of mechanical strength, operability, and the like. The thickness of the rigid support 17 is, for example, 100 μm or more and 50 mm or less.
In this embodiment, since the second adhesive layer 16 and the first adhesive layer 15 are attached to the hard support 17, the operability of the semiconductor wafer CP in the manufacturing process of the semiconductor device manufacturing method is improved.

‧Substrate peeling step
FIG. 8B is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step (substrate peeling step) of peeling the substrate 11 from the laminated body 1C after the hard support attaching step.
In the manufacturing method of this embodiment, the adhesive laminate 1C is peelable at the interface between the second adhesive layer 16 and the substrate 11.

‧Semiconductor wafer attaching steps
FIG. 8C is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step (semiconductor wafer attaching step) of attaching the semiconductor wafer CP to the second adhesive layer 16 exposed by peeling off the base material 11.
The semiconductor wafer CP used in this embodiment has a circuit surface W1 on which a connection terminal W3 is provided, and a wafer back surface W2 which is a back surface of an element on the opposite side to the circuit surface W1.
In this embodiment, a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP are attached to the second adhesive layer 16 as shown in FIG. 8C. When the semiconductor wafers CP are attached, they can be attached individually, or a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP can be attached at the same time.

‧Adhesive layer hardening step
FIG. 8D shows a step of curing the first adhesive layer 15 to form a first cured adhesive layer 15A, and curing the second adhesive layer 16 to form a second cured adhesive layer 16A (adhesive layer curing step) ). By hardening the second adhesive layer 16, the semiconductor wafer CP is strongly bonded by the second hardening adhesive layer 16A, and the movement of the semiconductor wafer CP in the subsequent resin sealing step can be suppressed.
The method of hardening the first adhesive layer 15 and the second adhesive layer 16 is the same as in the first embodiment, and is appropriately selected according to the type of the adhesive contained in the first adhesive layer 15 and the second adhesive layer 16. Better. In the case where the first adhesive layer 15 and the second adhesive layer 16 are configured by the same adhesive, the first adhesive layer 15 and the second adhesive layer 16 are preferably cured simultaneously.
When the second hardening adhesive layer 16A is used as a protective film for protecting the back surface of the wafer, this protective film is preferably colored, and black is more preferable. Therefore, it is preferable to mix the aforementioned coloring agent in the second adhesive layer 16.

‧Sealing step
FIG. 8E is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step (sealing step) of sealing a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP after the formation of the first hardening adhesive layer 15A and the second hardening adhesive layer 16A.
In this embodiment, the circuit surface W1 side of the semiconductor wafer CP is covered with the sealing member 30 to form the sealing body 3. A sealing member 30 is also filled between the plurality of semiconductor wafers CP. In this embodiment, since the rigid support body 17 is attached to the sealing body 3, the rigidity of the sealing body 3 is improved, and it is possible to suppress the semiconductor package from being bent after the resin is sealed. The method of sealing the plurality of semiconductor wafers CP using the sealing member 30 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the method described in the first embodiment. Examples of the material of the sealing member 30 include the materials and compositions described in the first embodiment.
In this embodiment, an additional hardening step described in the first embodiment may be performed. Alternatively, instead of performing an additional curing step, the sealing member 30 may be sufficiently cured by heating in the sealing step.

‧Procedure for connecting terminal exposure
FIG. 9A is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of exposing the connection terminal W3 of the semiconductor wafer CP on the surface of the sealing body 3 (the connection terminal exposing step).
In this embodiment, a part or the whole of the sealing resin layer of the sealing body 3 covering the circuit surface W1 of the semiconductor wafer CP or the connection terminal W3 is removed to expose the connection terminal W3. The step of exposing the connection terminal in this embodiment can be performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

‧Re-wiring layer formation steps
FIG. 9B is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of forming a redistribution layer 4 electrically connected to the semiconductor wafer CP (a redistribution layer formation step).
In this embodiment, the redistribution layer 4 is electrically connected to the connection terminal W3 exposed on the surface of the sealing body 3. The redistribution layer forming step in this embodiment can be performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment.
The redistribution layer 4 of this embodiment also includes an external electrode pad 41 for connecting external terminal electrodes. In this embodiment, the external electrode pads 41 are also formed in a plurality of places. In this embodiment, an external electrode pad 41 is also formed that is fan-out outside the area of the semiconductor wafer CP.

‧External terminal electrode connection steps
FIG. 9C is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step (external terminal electrode connection step) of electrically connecting the external terminal electrode 5 to the redistribution layer 4. The external terminal electrode connection step in this embodiment can be performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

‧Removal steps
FIG. 9D is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step (removal step) of removing the hard support 17. In this embodiment, the first hardening adhesive layer 15A is also removed, and the second hardening adhesive layer 16A is exposed. The second hardening adhesive layer 16A may be used as a protective film for protecting the back surface of the wafer. The surface of the second hardened adhesive layer 16A as a protective film may be printed with a laser mark or the like.

‧Single chip step
FIG. 9E is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a step of singulating the sealing body 3 to which the external terminal electrode 5 is connected (step of singulating).
The method of singulating the sealing body 3 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the same method as in the first embodiment. The step of singulating the sealing body 3 may be performed by attaching the sealing body 3 to an adhesive sheet such as a dicing sheet.
In the present embodiment, a semiconductor package 100 including a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP is manufactured by singulating the sealing body 3 into a plurality of semiconductor wafers CP. In the semiconductor package 100, the second hardening adhesive layer 16A is provided on the wafer back surface W2 of the semiconductor wafer CP. That is, the second adhesive layer 16 provided on the wafer back surface W2 of the semiconductor wafer CP is not temporarily fixed after being peeled off from the resin, but is firmly adhered to the semiconductor wafer as the second hardening adhesive layer 16A. CP is included as part of the semiconductor package 100.
In this embodiment, since the external terminal electrode 5 is connected to the external electrode pad 41 outside the area of the fan-out to the semiconductor chip CP, the semiconductor package 100 can be used as a fan-out type wafer-level package. (FO-WLP).

‧installation steps
It is also preferable that the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment includes a step of mounting the semiconductor package 100 on a printed circuit board or the like (the mounting step may be called).

‧ Effect of implementation form
According to the method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to this embodiment, since the hard support 17 is adhered to the first adhesive layer 15, the adhesiveness between the hard support 17 and the first adhesive layer 15 can be ensured and suppressed to The position of the semiconductor wafer CP at the time of sealing is shifted. The second hardening adhesive layer 16A can be used as a protective film remaining on the back surface of the wafer. Since the first hardened adhesive layer 15A and the second hardened adhesive layer 16A having the function of suppressing the position shift and the protective function can be formed in the same step, the manufacturing steps can be simplified.

[Deformation of implementation form]
The present invention is not limited in any way by the embodiments described above. The present invention is in a range that can achieve the object of the present invention, and includes modifications of the above-mentioned embodiments.
For example, the system on a semiconductor wafer or a semiconductor wafer is not limited to the arrangement, shape, and the like shown in the figure. The connection structure and the like to the external terminal electrodes in the semiconductor package are not limited to those described in the foregoing embodiment. In the foregoing embodiment, a mode for manufacturing a FO-WLP type semiconductor package is described as an example, but the present invention is also applicable to a mode for manufacturing other semiconductor packages such as a fan-in type WLP.
In the foregoing embodiment, a case in which a semiconductor package including a plurality of semiconductor wafers is singulated to form a semiconductor package including a plurality of semiconductor wafers will be described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Such an appearance. For example, the singulation step may be a state in which the respective semiconductor packages are singulated into a single body including semiconductor elements such as semiconductor wafers. In addition, for example, the singulation step may be a state in which each of the semiconductor packages is a semiconductor element including three or more semiconductor wafers, and the sealing body is singulated.
In the foregoing embodiment, the state in which the semiconductor element is attached to the substrate via the laminated adhesive layer is described as an example, but the number of layers of the adhesive layer is not limited to two, and it may be For 3 or more floors.
In the aforementioned embodiment, the adhesive laminate in which the adhesive layer has been laminated on the base material is described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this aspect. As another embodiment, for example, a state in which an adhesive layer is laminated on a semiconductor element such as a semiconductor wafer may be used. In this case, the semiconductor element can also be attached to the substrate through the adhesive layer on the back of the element, and can also be attached to the adhesive through the adhesive layer on the back of the element and the adhesive layer on the adhesive sheet. Flakes. The number of layers of the adhesive layer to be laminated on the semiconductor element is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

1‧‧‧接著層合體1‧‧‧ Laminated

1A‧‧‧接著層合體 1A‧‧‧Laminated

1B‧‧‧黏著薄片 1B‧‧‧Adhesive sheet

1C‧‧‧接著層合體 1C‧‧‧Laminated

2‧‧‧補強框架 2‧‧‧ Reinforcement Framework

3‧‧‧密封體 3‧‧‧Sealed body

3A‧‧‧密封體 3A‧‧‧Sealed body

3B‧‧‧密封體 3B‧‧‧Sealed body

3S‧‧‧密封體3之面 3S‧‧‧Surface of Sealing Body 3

4‧‧‧再配線層 4‧‧‧ redistribution layer

5‧‧‧外部端子電極 5‧‧‧External terminal electrode

11‧‧‧基材 11‧‧‧ Substrate

12‧‧‧接著劑層 12‧‧‧ Adhesive layer

12A‧‧‧硬化接著劑層 12A‧‧‧hardened adhesive layer

13‧‧‧黏著劑層 13‧‧‧Adhesive layer

14‧‧‧接著劑層 14‧‧‧ Adhesive layer

14A‧‧‧硬化接著劑層 14A‧‧‧hardened adhesive layer

15‧‧‧第一接著劑層 15‧‧‧first adhesive layer

15A‧‧‧第一硬化接著劑層 15A‧‧‧First hardening adhesive layer

16‧‧‧第二接著劑層 16‧‧‧Second adhesive layer

16A‧‧‧第二硬化接著劑層 16A‧‧‧Second hardening adhesive layer

17‧‧‧硬質支撐體 17‧‧‧ rigid support

30‧‧‧密封構件 30‧‧‧Sealing member

41‧‧‧外部電極墊 41‧‧‧External electrode pad

100‧‧‧半導體封裝 100‧‧‧Semiconductor Package

100A‧‧‧半導體封裝 100A‧‧‧Semiconductor Package

100C‧‧‧半導體封裝 100C‧‧‧Semiconductor Package

CP‧‧‧半導體晶片 CP‧‧‧Semiconductor wafer

W1‧‧‧電路面 W1‧‧‧Circuit Surface

W2‧‧‧晶片背面 W2‧‧‧ back of the chip

W3‧‧‧連接端子 W3‧‧‧connecting terminal

第1A圖係說明關於第1實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the first embodiment.

第1B圖係說明關於第1實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the first embodiment.

第1C圖係說明關於第1實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the first embodiment.

第1D圖係說明關於第1實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 1D is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the first embodiment.

第1E圖係說明關於第1實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 1E is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the first embodiment.

第2A圖係說明關於第1實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 2A is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the first embodiment.

第2B圖係說明關於第1實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 2B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the first embodiment.

第2C圖係說明關於第1實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 2C is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the semiconductor device according to the first embodiment.

第2D圖係說明關於第1實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 2D is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the semiconductor device according to the first embodiment.

第3A圖係說明關於第2實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 3A is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a second embodiment.

第3B圖係說明關於第2實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 3B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the second embodiment.

第3C圖係說明關於第2實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 3C is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the second embodiment.

第3D圖係說明關於第2實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 3D is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the second embodiment.

第4A圖係說明關於第2實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 4A is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the second embodiment.

第4B圖係說明關於第2實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the second embodiment.

第4C圖係說明關於第2實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 4C is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the second embodiment.

第4D圖係說明關於第2實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 4D is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the second embodiment.

第5A圖係說明關於第3實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 5A is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a third embodiment.

第5B圖係說明關於第3實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the third embodiment.

第5C圖係說明關於第3實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 5C is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the third embodiment.

第5D圖係說明關於第3實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 5D is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a third embodiment.

第5E圖係說明關於第3實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 5E is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the third embodiment.

第6A圖係說明關於第4實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 6A is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a fourth embodiment.

第6B圖係說明關於第4實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 6B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a fourth embodiment.

第6C圖係說明關於第4實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 6C is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the fourth embodiment.

第6D圖係說明關於第4實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 6D is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a fourth embodiment.

第6E圖係說明關於第4實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 6E is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the fourth embodiment.

第7A圖係說明關於第4實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 7A is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a fourth embodiment.

第7B圖係說明關於第4實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the fourth embodiment.

第7C圖係說明關於第4實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 7C is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the fourth embodiment.

第7D圖係說明關於第4實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 7D is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the fourth embodiment.

第8A圖係說明關於第5實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 8A is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a fifth embodiment.

第8B圖係說明關於第5實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 8B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the fifth embodiment.

第8C圖係說明關於第5實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 8C is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a fifth embodiment.

第8D圖係說明關於第5實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 8D is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a fifth embodiment.

第8E圖係說明關於第5實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 FIG. 8E is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to the fifth embodiment.

第9A圖係說明關於第5實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 9A is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a fifth embodiment.

第9B圖係說明關於第5實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 9B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a fifth embodiment.

第9C圖係說明關於第5實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 9C is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a fifth embodiment.

第9D圖係說明關於第5實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 9D is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a fifth embodiment.

第9E圖係說明關於第5實施形態的半導體裝置之製造方法的剖面圖。 Fig. 9E is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to a fifth embodiment.

Claims (15)

一種半導體裝置之製造方法,其特徵為具有: 隔著接著劑層而貼附基材與半導體元件的步驟; 使前述接著劑層硬化而形成硬化接著劑層的步驟; 密封複數之前述半導體元件而形成具有密封樹脂層的密封體的步驟; 不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層而是由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟; 形成與前述半導體元件電性連接的再配線層的步驟;及, 使外部端子電極電性連接於前述再配線層的步驟。A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device, comprising: A step of attaching the substrate and the semiconductor element via the adhesive layer; A step of hardening the aforementioned adhesive layer to form a hardened adhesive layer; A step of sealing a plurality of the aforementioned semiconductor elements to form a sealing body having a sealing resin layer; A step of peeling the base material from the sealing body without peeling the hardening adhesive layer from the sealing body; A step of forming a redistribution layer electrically connected to the semiconductor element; and A step of electrically connecting the external terminal electrode to the redistribution layer. 如請求項1之半導體裝置之製造方法,其中, 於具有前述基材與前述接著劑層的接著層合體之前述接著劑層,貼附複數之前述半導體元件。The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to claim 1, wherein: A plurality of the semiconductor elements are attached to the adhesive layer having the adhesive laminate of the substrate and the adhesive layer. 如請求項2之半導體裝置之製造方法,其中, 前述接著劑層係直接層合於前述基材。The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to claim 2, wherein: The said adhesive layer is laminated directly on the said base material. 如請求項2之半導體裝置之製造方法,其中, 在前述接著劑層與前述基材之間,包含黏著劑層。The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to claim 2, wherein: An adhesive layer is included between the adhesive layer and the substrate. 如請求項4之半導體裝置之製造方法,其中, 由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟係不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層,而是在前述黏著劑層與前述硬化接著劑層之界面剝離的步驟。The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to claim 4, wherein: The step of peeling the base material from the sealing body is a step of peeling at the interface between the adhesive layer and the hardening adhesive layer instead of peeling the hardening adhesive layer from the sealing body. 如請求項5之半導體裝置之製造方法,其中, 前述黏著劑層為熱膨脹性黏著劑層。The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to claim 5, wherein: The adhesive layer is a thermally expandable adhesive layer. 如請求項1之半導體裝置之製造方法,其中, 前述半導體元件係具有前述接著劑層。The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to claim 1, wherein: The semiconductor element includes the adhesive layer. 如請求項7之半導體裝置之製造方法,其中, 於具有前述基材與黏著劑層的黏著薄片之前述黏著劑層,貼合前述半導體元件之前述接著劑層。The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to claim 7, wherein: The adhesive layer of the semiconductor element is bonded to the adhesive layer of the adhesive sheet having the substrate and the adhesive layer. 如請求項8之半導體裝置之製造方法,其中, 由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟係不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層,而是在前述黏著劑層與前述硬化接著劑層之界面剝離的步驟。The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to claim 8, wherein: The step of peeling the base material from the sealing body is a step of peeling at the interface between the adhesive layer and the hardening adhesive layer instead of peeling the hardening adhesive layer from the sealing body. 如請求項2之半導體裝置之製造方法,其中, 前述接著劑層係至少包含第一接著劑層與第二接著劑層, 所謂前述第一接著劑層與前述第二接著劑層係材質為互相相異。The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to claim 2, wherein: The aforementioned adhesive layer includes at least a first adhesive layer and a second adhesive layer. The materials of the first adhesive layer and the second adhesive layer are different from each other. 如請求項10之半導體裝置之製造方法,其中, 使前述接著劑層硬化而形成前述硬化接著劑層的步驟係使前述第一接著劑層硬化而形成第一硬化接著劑層,與使前述第二接著劑層硬化而形成第二硬化接著劑層的步驟。The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to claim 10, wherein, The step of curing the adhesive layer to form the cured adhesive layer includes curing the first adhesive layer to form a first cured adhesive layer, and curing the second adhesive layer to form a second cured adhesive layer. A step of. 如請求項2之半導體裝置之製造方法,其中, 在隔著前述接著劑層而貼附複數之前述半導體元件與前述基材時,將與前述半導體元件之具有連接端子的電路面為相反側的元件背面,朝向前述接著劑層而貼附, 在密封複數之前述半導體元件而形成前述密封體後,除去覆蓋前述電路面的前述密封樹脂層之一部分或全體而使前述連接端子露出, 使前述再配線層電性連接於已露出的前述連接端子。The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to claim 2, wherein: When a plurality of the semiconductor element and the base material are pasted through the adhesive layer, the element back surface opposite to the circuit surface of the semiconductor element having a connection terminal is attached to the adhesive layer, After the plurality of semiconductor elements are sealed to form the sealing body, a part or the whole of the sealing resin layer covering the circuit surface is removed to expose the connection terminals, The redistribution layer is electrically connected to the exposed connection terminal. 如請求項2之半導體裝置之製造方法,其中, 在隔著前述接著劑層而貼附複數之前述半導體元件與前述基材時,將前述半導體元件之具有連接端子的電路面,朝向前述接著劑層而貼附, 由前述密封體剝離前述基材後,除去覆蓋前述電路面的前述硬化接著劑層之一部分或全體而使前述連接端子露出, 使前述再配線層電性連接於已露出的前述連接端子。The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to claim 2, wherein: When a plurality of the semiconductor element and the base material are attached via the adhesive layer, a circuit surface of the semiconductor element having a connection terminal is attached to the adhesive layer, After peeling the base material from the sealing body, removing a part or the whole of the hardening adhesive layer covering the circuit surface to expose the connection terminal, The redistribution layer is electrically connected to the exposed connection terminal. 如請求項1至請求項13中任一項之半導體裝置之製造方法,其中, 在使前述接著劑層硬化而形成前述硬化接著劑層的步驟之前,貼附補強框架於前述接著劑層。The method for manufacturing a semiconductor device according to any one of claim 1 to claim 13, wherein: Before the step of curing the adhesive layer to form the cured adhesive layer, a reinforcing frame is attached to the adhesive layer. 一種接著層合體,其係具備 基材,與 含有接著劑組成物的接著劑層, 其特徵為: 前述接著劑組成物係含有黏合劑聚合物成分及硬化性成分, 且被使用於半導體裝置之製造製程,該半導體裝置之製造製程係具有: 於前述接著層合體之前述接著劑層,貼附複數之半導體元件的步驟; 使前述接著劑層硬化而形成硬化接著劑層的步驟; 密封複數之前述半導體元件而形成密封體的步驟; 不由前述密封體剝離前述硬化接著劑層,而是由前述密封體剝離前述基材的步驟; 形成與前述半導體元件電性連接的再配線層的步驟;及, 使外部端子電極電性連接於前述再配線層的步驟。An adhesive laminate comprising: Substrate, with An adhesive layer containing an adhesive composition, Its characteristics are: The said adhesive composition system contains an adhesive polymer component and a hardening component, And it is used in the manufacturing process of the semiconductor device. The manufacturing process of the semiconductor device has: A step of attaching a plurality of semiconductor elements to the aforementioned adhesive layer of the aforementioned adhesive laminate; A step of hardening the aforementioned adhesive layer to form a hardened adhesive layer; A step of sealing a plurality of the aforementioned semiconductor elements to form a sealing body; A step of not peeling the hardening adhesive layer from the seal, but peeling the substrate from the seal; A step of forming a redistribution layer electrically connected to the semiconductor element; and A step of electrically connecting the external terminal electrode to the redistribution layer.
TW107126790A 2017-08-04 2018-08-02 Semiconductor device manufacturing method and adhesive laminate TW201921606A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017151766A JP2019033124A (en) 2017-08-04 2017-08-04 Semiconductor device manufacturing method and bonded laminate
JP2017-151766 2017-08-04

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201921606A true TW201921606A (en) 2019-06-01

Family

ID=65366709

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW107126790A TW201921606A (en) 2017-08-04 2018-08-02 Semiconductor device manufacturing method and adhesive laminate

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2019033124A (en)
KR (1) KR102611585B1 (en)
CN (1) CN109390240A (en)
TW (1) TW201921606A (en)

Families Citing this family (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020179875A1 (en) * 2019-03-06 2020-09-10 日立化成株式会社 Method for producing electronic component device and laminated film used therefor
WO2021019697A1 (en) 2019-07-30 2021-02-04 昭和電工マテリアルズ株式会社 Method for manufacturing electronic component device and electronic component device
EP3960445A4 (en) * 2019-04-26 2023-01-04 Mitsui Chemicals Tohcello, Inc. ADHESIVE FILM AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE MANUFACTURING METHOD
US20210125959A1 (en) * 2019-10-24 2021-04-29 Texas Instruments Incorporated Metal-covered chip scale packages
KR102827879B1 (en) * 2020-11-20 2025-07-01 주식회사 네패스 Method for manufacturing semiconductor package
WO2022118480A1 (en) * 2020-12-04 2022-06-09 昭和電工マテリアルズ株式会社 Method for manufacturing semiconductor device
CN113078251A (en) * 2021-03-16 2021-07-06 广东良友科技有限公司 High-power LED all-solid-state light source module packaging method and packaging structure thereof
CN118648099A (en) * 2022-01-13 2024-09-13 味之素株式会社 Method for manufacturing circuit board and resin sheet used therein
JP7485972B2 (en) * 2022-04-26 2024-05-17 日亜化学工業株式会社 Semiconductor device manufacturing method
WO2024095464A1 (en) * 2022-11-04 2024-05-10 株式会社レゾナック Semiconductor device manufacturing method

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004221417A (en) * 2003-01-16 2004-08-05 Casio Comput Co Ltd Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof
JP5296636B2 (en) * 2009-08-21 2013-09-25 新光電気工業株式会社 Manufacturing method of semiconductor package
US20130337608A1 (en) * 2011-03-10 2013-12-19 Sumitomo Bakelite Co., Ltd. Semiconductor device, and process for manufacturing semiconductor device
CN103650123A (en) * 2011-07-15 2014-03-19 日东电工株式会社 Method for manufacturing electronic component and adhesive sheet used in method for manufacturing electronic component
JP2013074184A (en) * 2011-09-28 2013-04-22 Nitto Denko Corp Semiconductor device manufacturing method
JP2014192463A (en) * 2013-03-28 2014-10-06 Lintec Corp Resin film formation sheet
JP2014239154A (en) * 2013-06-07 2014-12-18 日東電工株式会社 Method of manufacturing semiconductor device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR102611585B1 (en) 2023-12-07
KR20190015117A (en) 2019-02-13
JP2019033124A (en) 2019-02-28
CN109390240A (en) 2019-02-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TW201921606A (en) Semiconductor device manufacturing method and adhesive laminate
JP5615471B1 (en) Protective film forming film and protective film forming composite sheet
CN103305159B (en) The manufacturing method of adhesive composite, adhesive sheet and semiconductor device
TWI634185B (en) Composite film for forming protective film, wafer with protective film, and method for manufacturing wafer with protective film
KR20080088487A (en) Method of manufacturing adhesive composition, adhesive sheet and semiconductor device
CN103305160B (en) The manufacture method of adhesive composite, adhesive sheet and semiconductor device
KR20160060073A (en) Thermally curable resin sheet for sealing semiconductor chip, and method for manufacturing semiconductor package
US20080124839A1 (en) Adhesive Composition, Adhesive Sheet and Production Process for Semiconductor Device
JP7233377B2 (en) Thermosetting resin film and sheet for forming first protective film
WO2014192745A1 (en) Adhesive agent composition, adhesive sheet, and method for manufacturing semiconductor device
TWI765038B (en) Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing same
JP5237647B2 (en) Adhesive composition, adhesive sheet and method for producing semiconductor device
JP5344802B2 (en) Protective film forming sheet for chip and semiconductor chip with protective film
TWI825080B (en) Method for manufacturing semiconductor chip
JP7668179B2 (en) Laminate for semiconductor element encapsulation and method for manufacturing semiconductor device
JP5426831B2 (en) Adhesive composition, adhesive sheet and method for producing semiconductor device
JP5005325B2 (en) Adhesive composition, adhesive sheet and method for producing semiconductor device
TWI822962B (en) Method for manufacturing workpiece with first protective film
TWI833912B (en) Thermosetting resin film and first protective film forming sheet
TW202100629A (en) Thermosetting resin film, first protective film forming sheet, kit, and method for manufacturing first protective film-attached workpiece
TWI834820B (en) Thermosetting resin film and first protective film forming sheet
TW202515735A (en) Hardening resin film, method for manufacturing hardening sealant, hardening resin film composite sheet and hardening sealant
KR101093322B1 (en) Method of manufacturing adhesive composition, adhesive sheet and semiconductor device
JP2024139197A (en) Semiconductor wafer with protective film, semiconductor chip with protective film, method for protecting semiconductor wafer, method for manufacturing semiconductor wafer with protective film, and composite sheet
JP2008247937A (en) Sticky adhesive composition, sticky adhesive sheet and method for producing semiconductor device